US20060063271A1 - Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same - Google Patents
Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20060063271A1 US20060063271A1 US11/226,892 US22689205A US2006063271A1 US 20060063271 A1 US20060063271 A1 US 20060063271A1 US 22689205 A US22689205 A US 22689205A US 2006063271 A1 US2006063271 A1 US 2006063271A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- beads
- microbeads
- grating
- code
- grooves
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 239000011325 microbead Substances 0.000 title claims abstract description 166
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 131
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 347
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 117
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 21
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 133
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 claims description 19
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 claims description 17
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 14
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 claims description 8
- 239000005350 fused silica glass Substances 0.000 claims description 6
- 239000005388 borosilicate glass Substances 0.000 claims description 5
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 abstract description 61
- 238000011068 loading method Methods 0.000 abstract description 19
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 abstract description 3
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 100
- 239000011295 pitch Substances 0.000 description 58
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 33
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 32
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 32
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 28
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 26
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 22
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 21
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 17
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 16
- 239000002699 waste material Substances 0.000 description 16
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 15
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 15
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 14
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 14
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 14
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 12
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 11
- 238000013019 agitation Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000003595 spectral effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 239000007853 buffer solution Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000011049 filling Methods 0.000 description 8
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000012856 packing Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000011010 flushing procedure Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000012491 analyte Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000002019 doping agent Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000011859 microparticle Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000003534 oscillatory effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000010363 phase shift Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 230000008602 contraction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000003599 detergent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920002313 fluoropolymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000004811 fluoropolymer Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229920002120 photoresistant polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 238000010926 purge Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000009987 spinning Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 3
- ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Boron Chemical compound [B] ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052796 boron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005253 cladding Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000005289 controlled pore glass Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 2
- -1 e.g. Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052732 germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N germanium atom Chemical compound [Ge] GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001746 injection moulding Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005499 meniscus Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000002493 microarray Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000001020 plasma etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011148 porous material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052761 rare earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000002910 rare earth metals Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000009827 uniform distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- NCGICGYLBXGBGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-morpholin-4-yl-1-oxa-3-azonia-2-azanidacyclopent-3-en-5-imine;hydrochloride Chemical compound Cl.[N-]1OC(=N)C=[N+]1N1CCOCC1 NCGICGYLBXGBGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052691 Erbium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- DZMGFGQBRYWJOR-YUMQZZPRSA-N Met-Pro Chemical compound CSCC[C@H](N)C(=O)N1CCC[C@H]1C(O)=O DZMGFGQBRYWJOR-YUMQZZPRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylic acid group Chemical group C(C=C)(=O)O NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007792 addition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000006117 anti-reflective coating Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012298 atmosphere Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004323 axial length Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004166 bioassay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007844 bleaching agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007664 blowing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052681 coesite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000001427 coherent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002299 complementary DNA Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052906 cristobalite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000012864 cross contamination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001351 cycling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013523 data management Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000708 deep reactive-ion etching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005315 distribution function Methods 0.000 description 1
- UYAHIZSMUZPPFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N erbium Chemical compound [Er] UYAHIZSMUZPPFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008020 evaporation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 1
- CPBQJMYROZQQJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N helium neon Chemical compound [He].[Ne] CPBQJMYROZQQJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000008235 industrial water Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000009191 jumping Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000006193 liquid solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004020 luminiscence type Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003754 machining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001151 other effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002688 persistence Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002085 persistent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000005365 phosphate glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007747 plating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010287 polarization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001007 puffing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010349 pulsation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003134 recirculating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002310 reflectometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010079 rubber tapping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000012239 silicon dioxide Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000002002 slurry Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007921 spray Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052682 stishovite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012536 storage buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000010902 straw Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000026676 system process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012780 transparent material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052905 tridymite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000002604 ultrasonography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011800 void material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000080 wetting agent Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N35/00—Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
- G01N35/00584—Control arrangements for automatic analysers
- G01N35/00722—Communications; Identification
- G01N35/00732—Identification of carriers, materials or components in automatic analysers
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L3/00—Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
- B01L3/50—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
- B01L3/502—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures
- B01L3/5027—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip
- B01L3/502761—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip specially adapted for handling suspended solids or molecules independently from the bulk fluid flow, e.g. for trapping or sorting beads, for physically stretching molecules
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L3/00—Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
- B01L3/50—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
- B01L3/508—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes rigid containers not provided for above
- B01L3/5085—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes rigid containers not provided for above for multiple samples, e.g. microtitration plates
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03H—HOLOGRAPHIC PROCESSES OR APPARATUS
- G03H1/00—Holographic processes or apparatus using light, infrared or ultraviolet waves for obtaining holograms or for obtaining an image from them; Details peculiar thereto
- G03H1/02—Details of features involved during the holographic process; Replication of holograms without interference recording
- G03H1/0272—Substrate bearing the hologram
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00277—Apparatus
- B01J2219/00457—Dispensing or evacuation of the solid phase support
- B01J2219/00459—Beads
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00277—Apparatus
- B01J2219/00457—Dispensing or evacuation of the solid phase support
- B01J2219/00459—Beads
- B01J2219/00461—Beads and reaction vessel together
- B01J2219/00463—Directed sorting
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00277—Apparatus
- B01J2219/00457—Dispensing or evacuation of the solid phase support
- B01J2219/00459—Beads
- B01J2219/00466—Beads in a slurry
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00277—Apparatus
- B01J2219/00457—Dispensing or evacuation of the solid phase support
- B01J2219/0047—Pins
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00277—Apparatus
- B01J2219/00497—Features relating to the solid phase supports
- B01J2219/005—Beads
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00277—Apparatus
- B01J2219/0054—Means for coding or tagging the apparatus or the reagents
- B01J2219/00545—Colours
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00277—Apparatus
- B01J2219/0054—Means for coding or tagging the apparatus or the reagents
- B01J2219/00547—Bar codes
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00277—Apparatus
- B01J2219/0054—Means for coding or tagging the apparatus or the reagents
- B01J2219/00572—Chemical means
- B01J2219/00576—Chemical means fluorophore
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00583—Features relative to the processes being carried out
- B01J2219/00603—Making arrays on substantially continuous surfaces
- B01J2219/00646—Making arrays on substantially continuous surfaces the compounds being bound to beads immobilised on the solid supports
- B01J2219/00648—Making arrays on substantially continuous surfaces the compounds being bound to beads immobilised on the solid supports by the use of solid beads
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00583—Features relative to the processes being carried out
- B01J2219/00603—Making arrays on substantially continuous surfaces
- B01J2219/00657—One-dimensional arrays
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/00583—Features relative to the processes being carried out
- B01J2219/00603—Making arrays on substantially continuous surfaces
- B01J2219/00659—Two-dimensional arrays
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01J—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROCESSES, e.g. CATALYSIS OR COLLOID CHEMISTRY; THEIR RELEVANT APPARATUS
- B01J2219/00—Chemical, physical or physico-chemical processes in general; Their relevant apparatus
- B01J2219/00274—Sequential or parallel reactions; Apparatus and devices for combinatorial chemistry or for making arrays; Chemical library technology
- B01J2219/0068—Means for controlling the apparatus of the process
- B01J2219/00702—Processes involving means for analysing and characterising the products
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2200/00—Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
- B01L2200/06—Fluid handling related problems
- B01L2200/0636—Focussing flows, e.g. to laminate flows
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2200/00—Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
- B01L2200/06—Fluid handling related problems
- B01L2200/0647—Handling flowable solids, e.g. microscopic beads, cells, particles
- B01L2200/0668—Trapping microscopic beads
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2300/00—Additional constructional details
- B01L2300/06—Auxiliary integrated devices, integrated components
- B01L2300/0627—Sensor or part of a sensor is integrated
- B01L2300/0654—Lenses; Optical fibres
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2400/00—Moving or stopping fluids
- B01L2400/04—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means
- B01L2400/0403—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific forces
- B01L2400/0409—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific forces centrifugal forces
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2400/00—Moving or stopping fluids
- B01L2400/04—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means
- B01L2400/0403—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific forces
- B01L2400/0457—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific forces passive flow or gravitation
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2400/00—Moving or stopping fluids
- B01L2400/04—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means
- B01L2400/0475—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific mechanical means and fluid pressure
- B01L2400/0487—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific mechanical means and fluid pressure fluid pressure, pneumatics
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N15/00—Investigating characteristics of particles; Investigating permeability, pore-volume or surface-area of porous materials
- G01N15/10—Investigating individual particles
- G01N15/14—Optical investigation techniques, e.g. flow cytometry
- G01N15/1468—Optical investigation techniques, e.g. flow cytometry with spatial resolution of the texture or inner structure of the particle
- G01N15/147—Optical investigation techniques, e.g. flow cytometry with spatial resolution of the texture or inner structure of the particle the analysis being performed on a sample stream
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N35/00—Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
- G01N2035/00465—Separating and mixing arrangements
- G01N2035/00564—Handling or washing solid phase elements, e.g. beads
- G01N2035/00574—Means for distributing beads
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N35/00—Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
- G01N35/00584—Control arrangements for automatic analysers
- G01N35/00722—Communications; Identification
- G01N35/00732—Identification of carriers, materials or components in automatic analysers
- G01N2035/00742—Type of codes
- G01N2035/00782—Type of codes reprogrammmable code
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03H—HOLOGRAPHIC PROCESSES OR APPARATUS
- G03H2210/00—Object characteristics
- G03H2210/50—Nature of the object
- G03H2210/53—Coded object not directly interpretable, e.g. encrypted object, barcode
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03H—HOLOGRAPHIC PROCESSES OR APPARATUS
- G03H2230/00—Form or shape of the hologram when not registered to the substrate
- G03H2230/10—Microhologram not registered to the substrate
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03H—HOLOGRAPHIC PROCESSES OR APPARATUS
- G03H2270/00—Substrate bearing the hologram
- G03H2270/20—Shape
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03H—HOLOGRAPHIC PROCESSES OR APPARATUS
- G03H2270/00—Substrate bearing the hologram
- G03H2270/20—Shape
- G03H2270/24—Having particular size, e.g. microscopic
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T436/00—Chemistry: analytical and immunological testing
- Y10T436/25—Chemistry: analytical and immunological testing including sample preparation
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T436/00—Chemistry: analytical and immunological testing
- Y10T436/25—Chemistry: analytical and immunological testing including sample preparation
- Y10T436/2575—Volumetric liquid transfer
Definitions
- the present invention generally relates to a method and apparatus for processing information contained on microbeads, each microbead having an elongated body with a code embedded therein along a longitudinal axis thereof to be read by a code reading device; and more particularly to a method and apparatus for aligning the microbeads so the longitudinal axis thereof is in a fixed orientation relative to the code reading or other device.
- This invention also relates to transporting beads, and more particularly to transporting microbeads from one location to another.
- a coding element or platform that provides the capability of providing many codes (e.g., greater than 1 million codes), that can be made very small and/or that can withstand harsh environments.
- microbeads or microparticles may be used for various types of multiplexed chemical experiments or assays or for identifying, authenticating or sorting items.
- One challenge in transporting microbeads is being able to move them reliably from one location to another reliably and/or being able to move a predetermined number of beads.
- the present invention provides a new and unique method and apparatus for aligning new and unique coding elements or microbeads, wherein each microbead has an elongated body with a code embedded therein along a longitudinal axis thereof to be read by a code reading or other detection device.
- the method features the step of aligning the microbeads with a positioning device so the longitudinal axis of the microbeads is positioned in a fixed orientation relative to the code reading or other detection device.
- the new and unique microbeads are not spherical, but instead have an elongated shape and may be cylindrical, cubic, rectangular, or any other elongated shape.
- the microbeads are typically composed of silica glass with some germanium and/or boron doped region or regions that are photosensitive to ultraviolet light. Coded microbeads are individually identifiable via a single or series of spatially overlapping pitches written into them.
- the microbeads may be used in many different processes. After such processing, the microbeads have a resulting chemical content on the surface of each bead that is sensed and correlated in relation to the code contained with the microbead to determine information about the process.
- the microbeads When used in an assay process, are typically cylindrically (i.e. tubular) shaped glass beads and between 25 and 250 ⁇ m in diameter and between 100 and 500 ⁇ m long. Other sizes may be used if desired. They have a holographic code embedded in the central region of the bead, which is used to identify it from the rest of the beads in a batch of beads with many different DNA or other chemical probes. A cross reference is used to determine which probe is attached to which bead, thus allowing the researcher to correlate the chemical content on each bead with the measured fluorescence signal.
- the code consists of a diffraction grating 12 typically disposed along an axis of the microbead, there is a particular alignment required between the incident readout laser beam and the readout detector in two of the three rotational axes.
- the two of the three rotational axes include the pitch of the microbead in the front-to-back direction and the yaw of the microbead in a side-to-side direction.
- the third axis, rotation about the center axis of the cylinder, is azimuthally symmetric and therefore does not require alignment.
- the third axis is analogous to the roll axis.
- the invention provides a method for aligning the microbeads in the two rotational axes to a fixed orientation relative to an incident laser beam and a readout camera, otherwise known as the code camera.
- the invention further provides a method for rapidly aligning a large number of microbeads, between 1,000 and 1,000,000 microbeads or more, economically, and with the necessary tolerances.
- the method is flexible as it relates to the size of the microbeads and can be integrated into a fully automated system, which prepares the microbeads for rapid readout by an automated code-reading machine.
- the positioning device includes a plate with a series of parallel grooves (or channels), which could have one of several different shapes, including square, rectangular, v-shaped, semi-circular, etc., as well as a flat bottom groove with tapered walls.
- the grooves are formed into an optically transparent medium such as boro-silicate glass, fused silica, or other glasses, or plastic or other transparent support materials.
- the depth of the grooves will depend on the diameter of the microbead but generally they will be between 10 and 125 ⁇ m, but may be larger as discussed hereinafter, depending on the application.
- the spacing of the grooves is most optimal when it is between 1 and 2 times the diameter of the microbead, providing for both maximum packing density as well as maximum probability that a microbead will fall into a groove.
- the width of grooves is most optimal when the gap between the microbead and the walls of the grooves is sufficiently small to prevent the microbeads from rotating within the grooves by more than a few degrees.
- the bottom of the groove must also be maintained flat enough to prevent the microbeads from rotating, by more than a few tenths of a degree, relative to the incident laser beam.
- Another critical aspect of the grooved plate is the optical quality of the grooves.
- the beads can be read in the groove plate from below, on top of, or the side of the plate, depending on the application and type of microbead used.
- microbeads Once the microbeads are aligned, they can be read as many times as necessary to get a good reading or improve statistics.
- Microbeads can be mixed after reading then re-read to enhance the statistics of readout process.
- the positioning device may includes a tube having a bore for receiving, aligning and reading the microbeads.
- the present invention also provides an apparatus for aligning an optical identification element.
- the optical identification element having an optical substrate having at least a portion thereof with at least one diffraction grating disposed therein, the grating having at least one refractive index pitch superimposed at a common location, the grating providing an output optical signal when illuminated by an incident light signal, the optical output signal being indicative of a code, and the optical identification element being an elongated object with a longitudinal axis.
- the apparatus also having an alignment device which aligns the optical identification element such that said output optical signal is indicative of the code.
- the present invention also provides an optical element capable of having many optically readable codes.
- the element has a substrate containing an optically readable composite diffraction grating having one or more collocated index spacing or pitches ⁇ .
- the invention allows for a high number of uniquely identifiable codes (e.g., millions, billions, or more).
- the codes may be digital binary codes and thus are digitally readable or may be other numerical bases if desired.
- the elements may be very small “microbeads” (or microelements or microparticles or encoded particles) for small applications (about 1-1000 microns), or larger “macroelements” for larger applications (e.g., 1-1000 mm or much larger).
- the elements may also be referred to as encoded particles or encoded threads.
- the element may be embedded within or part of a larger substrate or object.
- the code in the element is interrogated using free-space optics and can be made alignment insensitive.
- the gratings are embedded inside (including on or near the surface) of the substrate and may be permanent non-removable codes that can operate in harsh environments (chemical, temperature, nuclear, electromagnetic, etc.).
- the code is not affected by spot imperfections, scratches, cracks or breaks in the substrate.
- the codes are spatially invariant. Thus, splitting or slicing an element axially produces more elements with the same code. Accordingly, when a bead is axially split-up, the code is not lost, but instead replicated in each piece.
- the invention is a significant improvement over prior art bead movement techniques in being able to repeatably move a predetermined number of beads from one location (or container or well) to another location (or container or well). Also, the invention provides for the reliable and repeatable transportation of all beads from one container or well to another or from one well to multiple wells using a “telegraph” technique.
- the invention is useful for creating multiplexed bead kits having a required number of beads of each code in a kit.
- the present invention may also be used to move the beads from a container to a reader to allow for the bead codes and/or chemistry on the beads to be read.
- the invention may be used in any assay or multiplexed experiment, combinatorial chemistry or biochemistry assay process, or in a taggant application, or any other application where beads are in a liquid solution and need to be transported, kitted and/or read.
- Advantages of the “telegraph” technique of the present invention are that it is low cost, fast, effective/reliable for moving beads, and low precision is required.
- Advantages of the pipetting techniques of the present invention is that the pippeter is a standard off the shelf product, it is flexible to be used with any type of well or container (e.g., sizes, shapes and other characteristics), or other fluid configurations, and does not require any sealing or physical connections to the wells.
- FIG. 1 shows the steps of a microbead platform assay process.
- FIG. 2 is a side view of an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 3 is a top level optical schematic for reading a code in an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a grooved plate for use with an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 5 is a diagram of the flat grooves and an example of the dimensionality thereof in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a plate with holes for use with an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a grooved plate for use with an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 8 is a diagram of a microbead mapper reading, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 8 a is a diagram of a system for both detecting a material on and reading a code in a microbead, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 9 is a diagram of a plate having microbeads thereon in relation to an open plate format for detection and reading of the microbead in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram of a starting point for handling microbeads for readout in a cuvette process in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 11 is a diagram of a second step in the readout process in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 12 is a diagram of the readout step in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 13 is a diagram of final steps in the cuvette process in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 14 is a diagram of an example of the cuvette showing its mount on a kinematic plate in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 15 is a diagram of an alternative embodiment of a cuvette showing a port for fluid filling/emptying using a pipette in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 16 is a diagram of an alternative embodiment of a cuvette showing an alternative port for fluid filling/emptying using a pipette in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 17 is a diagram of a two zone cuvette showing a free region and a trapped region in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 18 ( a ) is a diagram of steps for a conventional flow cytometer reader in a single pass cytometer process in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 18 ( b ) is a diagram of steps for a disk cytometer reader in a multipass cytometer process in accordance with the invention.
- FIGS. 19 ( a ), ( b ) and ( c ) show embodiments of a disk cytometer in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 20 ( a ) show an embodiment of a disk cytometer having radial channels for spin drying in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 20 ( b ) show an alternative embodiment of a disk cytometer having a mechanical iris for providing a variable aperture for bead access to grooves in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 21 show an embodiment of a SU8 groove plate having 450 in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 21 show an embodiment of a SU8 cylindrical grooved plate having 450 ⁇ 65 microns beads in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 22 show an embodiment of an alignment tube in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 23 show an alternative embodiment of an alignment tube having a receiving flange in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 24 is an optical schematic for reading a code in an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 25 ( a ) is an image of a code on a CCD camera from an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 25 ( b ) is a graph showing an digital representation of bits in a code in an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 26 illustrations (a)-(c) show images of digital codes on a CCD camera, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 27 illustrations (a)-(d) show graphs of different refractive index pitches and a summation graph, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 28 is an alternative optical schematic for reading a code in an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 29 illustrations (a)-(b) are graphs of reflection and transmission wavelength spectrum for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIGS. 30-31 are side views of a thin grating for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 32 is a perspective view showing azimuthal multiplexing of a thin grating for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 33 is side view of a blazed grating for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 34 is a graph of a plurality of states for each bit in a code for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 35 is a side view of an optical identification element where light is incident on an end face, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIGS. 36-37 are side views of an optical identification element where light is incident on an end face, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 38 illustrations (a)-(c), are side views of an optical identification element having a blazed grating, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 39 is a side view of an optical identification element having a coating, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 40 is a side view of whole and partitioned optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 41 is a side view of an optical identification element having a grating across an entire dimension, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 42 illustrations (a)-(c), are perspective views of alternative embodiments for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 43 illustrations (a)-(b), are perspective views of an optical identification element having multiple grating locations, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 44 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 45 is a view an optical identification element having a plurality of gratings located rotationally around the optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 46 illustrations (a)-(e), show various geometries of an optical identification element that may have holes therein, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 47 illustrations (a)-(c), show various geometries of an optical identification element that may have teeth thereon, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 48 illustrations (a)-(c), show various geometries of an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 49 is a side view an optical identification element having a reflective coating thereon, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIG. 50 illustrations (a)-(b), are side views of an optical identification element polarized along an electric or magnetic field, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIGS. 51 and 52 are diagrams of bead reads from flat retro-reflector trays, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIGS. 53 and 54 are diagrams of beads read thru V-grooves, in accordance with the present invention.
- FIGS. 55-83 are various alternative embodiments of the present invention.
- FIG. 1 shows, by way of example, steps of a microbead assay process which uses the microbead technology of the present invention.
- the steps of the assay process shown in FIG. 1 include a first step in which the microbeads are used in a solution; a second step in which the microbeads are aligned in a desired manner; a third step in which the code and florescence in and/or on the microbeads are read-out; and a fourth step in which the information related to the code and florescence is processed in relation to data management and bioinformatics.
- the present invention primarily relates to step 2 wherein the microbeads are uniquely aligned so the longitudinal axis of the microbeads is positioned in a fixed orientation relative to the code and florescence reading device, as well as relating to a lesser extent to step 3 . It is important to note that the scope of the present invention is not intended to be limited to any particular type or kind of assay process or other process in which the microbead technology is used. The scope of the invention is intended to include embodiments in which the microbead technology of the present invention is used in many different processes.
- FIG. 2 The Microbead Element 8
- FIG. 2 shows a diffraction grating-based optical identification element 8 (or encoded element or coded element) that comprises a known optical substrate 10 , having an optical diffraction grating 12 disposed (or written, impressed, embedded, imprinted, etched, grown, deposited or otherwise formed) in the volume of or on a surface of the substrate 10 along the length or longitudinal axis L of the element 8 , which is otherwise known hereinafter as the microbead.
- the grating 12 is a periodic or aperiodic variation in the effective refractive index and/or effective optical absorption of at least a portion of the substrate 10 .
- optical identification element 8 described herein is same as that described in Copending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/661,234, filed Sep. 12, 2003, entitled “Diffraction Grating-Based Optical Identification Element”, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- the substrate 10 has an inner region 20 where the grating 12 is located.
- the inner region 20 may be photosensitive to allow the writing or impressing of the grating 12 .
- the substrate 10 has an outer region 18 , which does not have the grating 12 therein.
- the grating 12 is a combination of one or more individual spatial periodic sinusoidal variations (or components) in the refractive index that are collocated at substantially the same location on the substrate 10 along the length of the grating region 20 , each having a spatial period (or pitch) ⁇ .
- the resultant combination of these individual pitches is the grating 12 , comprising spatial periods ( ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n) each representing a bit in the code.
- the grating 12 represents a unique optically readable code, made up of bits, where a bit corresponds to a unique pitch ⁇ within the grating 12 .
- the code is determined by which spatial periods ( ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n) exist (or do not exist) in a given composite grating 12 .
- the code or bits may also be determined by additional parameters (or additional degrees of multiplexing), and other numerical bases for the code may be used, as discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application.
- the grating 12 may also be referred to herein as a composite or collocated grating. Also, the grating 12 may be referred to as a “hologram”, as the grating 12 transforms, translates, or filters an input optical signal to a predetermined desired optical output pattern or signal.
- the substrate 10 has an outer diameter D 1 and comprises silica glass (SiO 2 ) having the appropriate chemical composition to allow the grating 12 to be disposed therein or thereon.
- silica glass SiO 2
- Other materials for the optical substrate 10 may be used if desired.
- the substrate 10 may be made of any glass, e.g., silica, phosphate glass, borosilicate glass, or other glasses, or made of glass and plastic, or solely plastic.
- the optical substrate 10 made of a glass material is desirable. If a flexible substrate is needed, plastic, rubber or polymer-based substrate may be used.
- the optical substrate 10 may be any material capable of having the grating 12 disposed in the grating region 20 and that allows light to pass through it to allow the code to be optically read.
- the optical substrate 10 with the grating 12 has a length L and an outer diameter D 1 , and the inner region 20 diameter D.
- the length L can range from very small “microbeads” (or microelements, micro-particles, or encoded particles), about 1-1000 microns or smaller, to larger “macro beads” or “macroelements” for larger applications (about 1.0-1000 mm or greater).
- the outer dimension D 1 can range from small (less than 1000 microns) to large (1.0-1000 mm and greater). Other dimensions and lengths for the substrate 10 and the grating 12 may be used.
- the grating 12 may have a length Lg of about the length L of the substrate 10 .
- the length Lg of the grating 12 may be shorter than the total length L of the substrate 10 .
- the outer region 18 is made of pure silica (SiO 2 ) and has a refractive index n 2 of about 1.458 (at a wavelength of about 1553 nm), and the inner grating region 20 of the substrate 10 has dopants, such as germanium and/or boron, to provide a refractive index n 1 of about 1.453, which is less than that of outer region 18 by about 0.005.
- dopants such as germanium and/or boron
- the grating region 20 may have an index of refraction that is larger than that of the outer region 18 or grating region 20 may have the same index of refraction as the outer region 18 if desired.
- FIG. 3 The Code Reader or Detector 29
- FIG. 3 shows a configuration for reading or detecting the code in the microbead 8 using a code reader or other detector device 29 , which is used in step 3 of the process shown in FIG. 1 .
- an incident light 24 of a wavelength ⁇ e.g., 532 nm from a known frequency doubled Nd:YAG laser or 632 nm from a known Helium-Neon laser, is incident on the grating 12 in the substrate 10 .
- Any other input wavelength ⁇ can be used if desired provided ⁇ is within the optical transmission range of the substrate (discussed more herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application).
- a portion of the input light 24 passes straight through the grating 12 , as indicated by a line 25 .
- the output light 27 may be a plurality of beams, each having the same wavelength ⁇ as the input wavelength ⁇ and each having a different output angle indicative of the pitches ( ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n) existing in the grating 12 .
- the input light 24 may be a plurality of wavelengths and the output light 27 may have a plurality of wavelengths indicative of the pitches ( ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n) existing in the grating 12 .
- the output light may be a combination of wavelengths and output angles.
- the code reader or detector 29 has the necessary optics, electronics, software and/or firmware to perform the functions described herein.
- the detector reads the optical signal 27 diffracted or reflected from the grating 12 and determines the code based on the pitches present or the optical pattern, as discussed more herein or in the aforementioned patent application.
- An output signal indicative of the code is provided on a line 31 .
- the dimensions, geometries, materials, and material properties of the substrate 10 are selected such that the desired optical and material properties are met for a given application.
- the resolution and range for the optical codes are scalable by controlling these parameters as discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application.
- the beads 8 may be made of any of the materials, geometries, and coatings described in copending U.S. patent application Ser. No. (Docket No. CV-0038A).
- cylindrical beads having size of about 65 micron diameter and 400 microns long and about 28 microns diameter and about 250 microns long.
- other bead sizes may be used.
- FIG. 4 The Grooved Tray or Plate
- FIG. 4 shows one embodiment of a positioning device 200 for aligning the microbeads 8 so the longitudinal axis of the microbeads is in a fixed orientation relative to the code reading or other detection device.
- the positioning device 200 is shown in the form of a tray or plate 200 having v-grooves 205 for align the microbeads 8 and is used in step 2 of the process shown in FIG. 1 .
- the microbead elements 8 are placed in the tray 200 with v-grooves 205 to allow the elements 8 to be aligned in a predetermined direction for illumination and reading/detection as discussed herein.
- the grooves 205 may have holes 210 that provide suction to keep the elements 8 in position.
- the grooves in the groove plate may be made in many different ways, including being formed by SU8 photoresistant material, mechanically machining; deep reactive ion etching; or injection molding.
- One advantage of the injection molding approach is that the plate can be manufactured in volume at relatively low cost, and disposed of after the information about the beads is gathered in the assay process.
- the groove plate may be made of glass, including fused silica, low fluorescence glass, boro silicate glass, or other transparent glasses or plastic. Silicon is used because it is reflective so a reflective coating is typically not needed. Alternative, a mirror coating can be applied to the plate material to achieve the desired reflectivity.
- FIG. 5 Flat Grooves
- FIG. 5 shows a diagram a plate 300 having flat grooves 302 instead of V-grooves as shown in FIG. 3 .
- Some characteristics of the groove according to the present invention are as follows:
- the groove width (w) should be at least as wide as the diameter of the bead (D) but not larger than D+15 ⁇ m.
- the thickness of the depth of the groove (T) should be at least 0.5 times the diameter of the bead so that it sufficiently traps a bead once it falls into the groove even when it is subjected to mechanical agitation.
- the depth should not exceed 1.5 times the diameter of the bead so as to prevent more than one bead from falling into the same groove location.
- Groove plates have been made using a thick photoresist called SU8 and is available from Microchem.
- the resist is both chemically inert and mechanically robust once fully cured.
- the groove walls are formed by the resist material, which is deposited onto a glass or substrate. Advantages of this process include the ability to tailor the depth of groove by controlling the thickness of the resist material, and virtually every other geometric attribute through the design of the photo mask. Because it is photolithographic process, essentially any shape profile can be made. For example grooves can be made in simple rows, concentric circles, or spirals. Other features such as discrete wells, spots and cross hatches can be made as fiducial marks for tracking and positional registration purposes.
- the scope of the invention is also intended to include the grooves having a flat bottom as shown in FIG. 5 with outwardly tapered walls.
- FIG. 6 The Holey Plate 674
- FIG. 6 shows an alternative embodiment, wherein alignment may be achieved by using a plate 674 having holes 676 slightly larger than the elements 8 if the light 24 ( FIGS. 2 and 4 ) is incident along the grating axis 207 .
- the incident light indicated as 670 is reflected off the grating and exits through the end as a light 672 and the remaining light passes through the grating and the plate 674 as a line 678 .
- incident light 670 may be reflected out the side of the plate (or any other desired angle), as indicated by a line 680 .
- input light may be incident from the side of the plate 674 and reflected out the top of the plate 674 as indicated by a line 684 .
- the light 670 may be a plurality of separate light beams or a single light beam 686 that illuminates the entire tray 674 if desired.
- FIG. 7 V-Groove Plate 200 with End Illumination
- FIG. 7 shows an alternative embodiment, wherein the v-groove plate discussed hereinbefore with FIG. 4 may be used for the end illumination/readout condition.
- the grating 12 may have a blaze angle such that light incident along the axial grating axis will be reflected upward, downward, or at a predetermined angle for code detection.
- the input light may be incident on the grating in a downward, upward, or at a predetermined angle and the grating 12 may reflect light along the axial grating axis for code detection.
- FIG. 8 Microbead Mapper Readings
- FIG. 8 shows microbeads 8 arranged on a plate 200 having grooves 205 .
- the microbeads 8 have different codes (e.g. “41101”, “20502”, “41125”) using 16-bit, binary symbology), which may be read or detected using the reader or detector configuration described in relation to FIG. 3 .
- the codes in the beads are used to provide a cross reference to determine which probe is attached to which bead, thus allowing the researcher to correlate the chemical content on each bead with the measured fluorescence signal in Step 3 of the process shown in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 8 a shows a code reader and detector for obtaining information from the microbead 8 in FIG. 8 .
- the codes in the microbeads 8 are detected when illuminated by incident light 24 which produces a diffracted or output light signal 27 to a reader 820 , which includes the optics and electronics necessary to read the codes in each bead 8 , as described herein and/or in the aforementioned copending patent application.
- the reader 820 provides a signal on a line 822 indicative of the code in each of the bead 8 .
- the incident light 24 may be directed transversely from the side of the grooved plate 200 (or from an end or any other angle) with a narrow band (single wavelength) and/or multiple wavelength source, in which case the code is represented by a spatial distribution of light and/or a wavelength spectrum, respectively, as described hereinafter and in the aforementioned copending patent application.
- a narrow band single wavelength
- multiple wavelength source in which case the code is represented by a spatial distribution of light and/or a wavelength spectrum, respectively, as described hereinafter and in the aforementioned copending patent application.
- Other illumination, readout techniques, types of gratings, geometries, materials, etc. may be used for the microbeads 8 , as discussed hereinafter and in the aforementioned patent application.
- an optical excitation signal 800 is incident on the microbeads 8 on the grooved plate 200 and a fluorescent optical output signal 802 emanates from the beads 8 that have the fluorescent molecule attached.
- the fluorescent optical output signal 802 passes through a lens 804 , which provides focused light 802 to a known optical fluorescence detector 808 .
- other imaging optics may be used to provide the desired characteristics of the optical image/signal onto the fluorescence detector 808 .
- the detector 808 provides an output signal on a line 810 indicative of the amount of fluorescence on a given bead 8 , which can then be interpreted to determine what type of chemical is attached to the bead 10 .
- the grooved plate 200 may be made of glass or plastic or any material that is transparent to the code reading incident beam 24 and code reading output light beams 27 as well as the fluorescent excitation beam 800 and the output fluorescent optical signal 802 , and is properly suited for the desired application or experiment, e.g., temperature range, harsh chemicals, or other application specific requirements.
- the code signal 822 from the bead code reader 820 and the fluorescent signal 810 from the fluorescence detector are provided to a known computer 812 .
- the computer 812 reads the code associated with each bead and determines the chemical probe that was attached thereto from a predetermined table that correlates a predetermined relationship between the bead code and the attached probed.
- the computer 812 and reads the fluorescence associated with each bead and determines the sample or analyte that is attached to the bead from a predetermined table that correlates a predetermined relationship between the fluorescence tag and the analyte attached thereto.
- the computer 812 determines information about the analyte and/or the probe as well as about the bonding of the analyte to the probe, and provides such information on a display, printout, storage medium or other interface to an operator, scientist or database for review and/or analysis, consistent with shown in step 4 of FIG. 1 .
- the sources 801 , 803 the code reader 820 , the fluorescence optics 804 and detector 808 and the computer 812 may all be part of an assay stick reader 824 .
- the reader 24 may have only one source beam which provides both the reflected optical signal 27 for determining the code and the fluorescence signal 802 for reading the tagged analyte attached to the beads 8 .
- the input optical signal is a common wavelength that performs both functions simultaneously, or sequentially, if desired.
- the microbeads 8 may be coated with the desired probe compound, chemical, or molecule prior to being placed in the grooved plate 200 .
- the beads 8 may be coated with the probe after being placed in the grooved plate 200 .
- the probe material may be an Oligo, cDNA, polymer, or any other desired probe compound, chemical, cell, or molecule for performing an assay.
- the scope of the invention is not intended to be limited to using or detecting fluorescent molecule markers during the assay process.
- embodiments of the invention are envisioned using and detection other types of molecular markers in other types of processes.
- FIG. 9 Open Format Approach
- FIG. 9 shows the first, or open plate format, meaning there is no top to cover the microbeads 8 and the v-grooves 205 .
- the microbeads 8 are dispensed onto the plate 200 using, for example, a pipette tip or syringe tip, although the scope of the invention is not intended to be limited to the manner of depositing the microbeads on the plate.
- the microbeads 8 may be then agitated by a sonic transducer (not shown), or manipulated with a mechanical wiper (not shown) or some form of spray nozzle (not shown) to encourage all the microbeads 8 to line up in the grooves 205 .
- microbead 8 a , 8 b there are always some microbeads, such as microbead 8 a , 8 b , that do not fall naturally into the grooves, and these must either be removed from the plate 200 or forced to fall into a groove 205 .
- the open format approach has the advantages that grooves plate consists just of the plate and no other complicated features such as walls and a top, and possibly other chambers or channels to allow fluid flow and bubble removal. It also has the advantage that it can easily be made with a standard microscope slide, which is designed to fit conventional micro array readers or microscopes. However, the open format approach would most likely require the microbeads to be dried out prior to reading, to prevent non-uniform and unpredictable optical aberrations caused by the uneven evaporation of the buffer solution.
- FIGS. 10 - 17 The Closed Format Approach
- FIGS. 10-17 show the second mode which is called a closed format, that consists of not only of a groove plate but also a top and at least three walls to hold the solution and the microbeads in a cuvette-like device (or cell or chamber) generally indicated as 500 shown, for example, in FIG. 10 .
- the closed format approach provides a method for effectively distributing and aligning microbeads during the readout process, as described below:
- the basic process for handling microbeads with a curvette for readout consists of the following steps:
- FIG. 10 shows a starting point for handling microbeads for a readout.
- the microbeads start in a test tube. Typical test-tube volumes are 1.5 ml.
- the microbeads will generally be in a liquid (usually water with a small amount of other buffer chemicals to adjust pH and possibly a small amount [ ⁇ 0.01%] of detergent.)
- a bead tube 502 contains the microbeads in a solution, which forms part of step 1 of the process shown in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 11 shows the bead tube 502 is coupled to a flange 504 of the cuvette 500 is inverted and the beads flow onto the groove plate.
- the cuvette consists of two round flanges that accept test-tubes, a transparent window, and an opposing groove plate.
- FIG. 14 shows a drawing of a prototype cuvette.
- the groove plate outer dimensions can be any size, but typical microscope slide dimensions are convenient (1′′ ⁇ 3′′).
- the grooves are mechanically or laser cut lengthwise, and have dimensions that are chosen for the exact size of cylindrical microbead. For instance, for a 125 ⁇ m diameter bead, grooves of approximately 150 ⁇ m wide by 150 ⁇ m deep are used.
- One tube carries the microbeads and a small amount of carrier fluid.
- the second tube may be larger and hold more fluid. The purpose of the second tube is to guarantee a certain fluid level in the next step.
- FIG. 12 shows the readout step, in which, after the beads are all (or nearly all) aligned in the groove plate, the entire plate is moved (or the readout laser beam is scanned) in order to read the codes of each beam, which forms part of step 3 of the process shown in FIG. 1 .
- the entire cuvette is moved back and forth across a readout beam.
- the readout beam is transmitted through the cuvette and contains the code bits encoded on the scattering angles.
- FIG. 13 shows a final step, in which the cuvette is inverted to its original position and the beads flow back into the original tube 502 , which forms part of step 3 of the process shown in FIG. 1 .
- the cuvette is re-inverted and the microbeads flow back into the original test tube.
- FIG. 14 shows an example of a cuvette generally indicated as 700 that is mounted on a kinematic base plate 710 .
- the cuvette 700 has a tube 702 for holding the solution with the beads and a top window 704 that is a 1 mm thick glass plate having dimensions of about 1′′ by 3′′.
- the cuvette also has a bottom plate that is a transparent groove plate.
- the location pins 712 and lever arm 714 hold the cuvette 700 in place on the kinematic plate 710 .
- One of the key advantages of using the cuvette device is that the potential to nearly index match the glass microbeads with a buffer solution thereby reducing the divergence of the laser beam caused by the lensing effect of the microbeads, and minimizing scatter form the groove plate itself.
- Another advantage involves the potential to prevent microbeads from ever stacking up on top of each other, by limiting the space between the bottom and the top plate to be less than twice the diameter of the microbeads.
- Another advantage is that the cover keeps the fluid from evaporating.
- FIGS. 15-16 show alternative embodiments of the cuvette shown in FIGS. 10-14 .
- the microbeads are injected into the cuvette by placing them near the edge of the opening and allowing the surface tension, or an induced fluid flow, to pull the microbeads into the cuvette, where, because of the limited height between the floor and the ceiling of the cuvette, they are confined to move around in a plane, albeit with all the rotational degrees of freedom unconstrained.
- the microbeads are quickly and sufficiently constrained by the grooves as the microbeads fall into them.
- some form of agitation ultrasonic, shaking, rocking, etc.
- FIG. 17 Two Region Approach
- FIG. 17 shows an alternative embodiment of the closed approach, which involves sectioning the closed region into two regions, one where the microbeads are free to move about in a plane, either in a groove or not, and a second region where the microbeads are trapped in a groove and can only move along the axes of a groove. Trapping the microbeads in a groove is accomplished by further reducing the height of the chamber to the extent that the microbeads can no longer hop out of a groove.
- the free region is used to pre-align the microbeads into a groove, facilitating the introduction of microbeads into the trapped section.
- FIGS. 18 - 23 The Cytometer
- FIGS. 18-23 show method and apparatus related to using a cytometer.
- FIG. 18 ( a ) shows steps for a method related to a conventional (single pass) flow cytometer reader and FIG. 18 ( b ) shows a method related to a disk cytometer reader (multipass).
- the method generally indicated as 900 has a step for providing beads and a solution similar to step 1 in FIG. 1 ; and a step for reading information from the beads similar to steps 2 and 3 in FIG. 1 .
- the method generally indicated as 1000 has a step for providing beads and solution similar to step 1 in FIG. 1 ; and a step for spinning and reading information from the beads similar to steps 2 and 3 in FIG. 1 .
- a rotating disk (see FIGS. 19 ( a ), ( b ) and ( c ) and 20 ) is used for aligning the microbeads consistent with step 2 of the process shown in FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 19 ( a ) shows an embodiment of a cytometer bead reader having a rotating disk generally indicated as 1250 , having a disk platform 1252 with circumferential, concentric, grooves 1254 for aligning microbeads 8 .
- the rotating disk 1250 has various sectors for processing the microbeads, including a bead loading zone 1256 , a bead removal zone 1258 and a readout zone 1260 , as well as a barrier 1259 for preventing the microbeads from flying off the plate.
- a window 1262 for reading the beads is in contact with the fluid containing the beads.
- FIG. 19 ( b ) shows an alternative embodiment of a rotating disk generally indicated as 1200 , having a disk platform 1202 with planar groove plates 1204 a, b, c, d , e, f that are shown with grooves oriented in any one or more different ways.
- One or more of the planar groove plates 1204 a, b, c, d , e, f may have an optional channel for fluid run-off, as shown, and a barrier ( FIG. 19 ( a )) for preventing the microbeads from flying off the plate. All other attributes may be the same as described in FIG. 19 ( a ).
- a window 1263 may be used for loading and/or reading the beads on the groove plates 1204 a, b, c, d , e, f.
- FIG. 19 ( c ) shows an alternative embodiment of a rotating disk generally indicated as 1280 , having a disk platform 1282 with radial grooves 1284 a , 1284 b .
- the disk platform 1282 has a bead loading zone 1286 in the center of the disk.
- One advantage of this embodiment is that the opening of the bead loading zone 1286 will also serve to allow the release of air bubbles that will naturally collect in the center of the disk due the reduced density of the fluid, which results from the centrifugal force pushing the fluid radially outwardly.
- the rotating disk 1280 has tight bead packing due to the centrifugal forces due to the spinning action of the disk.
- the rotating disk 1280 has a wedge shape spacer 1288 that keeps the channel at a constant gap width and a wall 1290 .
- FIG. 20 ( a ) shows an alternative embodiment of a rotating disk generally indicated as 1300 having narrow radial channels 1302 for spin drying so liquid is forced out of the circumferential grooves through the radial channels.
- the plate 1300 may have a mechanical catcher 1320 coupled thereto for moving radially outwardly in direction 1320 a if desired, for recirculating loose beads.
- FIG. 20 ( b ) show an alternative embodiment of a disk cytometer 1400 having a mechanical iris 1402 for providing a variable aperture for bead access to grooves in accordance with the invention.
- FIG. 21 shows a rotating groove plate having 450 by 65 microns beads arranged in the rotating SU8 circumferential channels.
- the disk may rotate as discussed above and/or the reader excitation laser(s)/detector(s) may rotate to read the code and/or the fluorescence on the beads 8 .
- FIGS. 22 - 23 The Alignment Tube 502
- the microbeads may be aligned in a tube 502 that has a diameter that is only slightly larger than the substrate 10 , e.g., about 1-50 microns, and that is substantially transparent to the incident light 24 .
- the incident light 24 may pass through the tube 502 as indicated by the light 500 or be reflected back due to a reflective coating on the tube 502 or the substrate as shown by return light 504 .
- Other techniques can be used for alignment if desired.
- FIG. 23 shows the tube 502 has an opening flange 512 for receiving the microbeads.
- FIG. 23 also shows an excitation laser 550 , a diode laser 552 and a CCD camera 554 for gathering information from the bead 8 consistent with that discussed above.
- the beads 8 may be aligned and flowed through the tube 502 (similar to that discussed with FIG. 18 ( a ) flow cytometer). In that case, fluid (liquid and/or gas) may flow through the tube 508 to move the beads 8 along the tube 502 , using a flow cytometer approach.
- FIGS. 24-44 provide a method and apparatus for reading the code in the microbeads 8 , as well as a more detailed description of the microbeads 8 and certain alternative embodiments therefore.
- the scope of the invention is not intended to be limited in any way to the manner in which the code is read, or the method of doing the same.
- the reflected light 27 comprises a plurality of beams 26 - 36 that pass through a lens 37 , which provides focused light beams 46 - 56 , respectively, which are imaged onto a CCD camera 60 .
- the lens 37 and the camera 60 and any other necessary electronics or optics for performing the functions described herein, make up the reader 29 .
- other imaging optics may be used to provide the desired characteristics of the optical image/signal onto the camera 60 (e.g., spots, lines, circles, ovals, etc.), depending on the shape of the substrate 10 and input optical signals.
- a CCD camera other devices may be used to read/capture the output light.
- the image on the CCD camera 60 is a series of illuminated stripes indicating ones and zeros of a digital pattern or code of the grating 12 in the element 8 .
- lines 68 on a graph 70 are indicative of a digitized version of the image of FIG. 25 as indicated in spatial periods ( ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n).
- Each of the individual spatial periods ( ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n) in the grating 12 is slightly different, thus producing an array of N unique diffraction conditions (or diffraction angles) discussed more hereinafter.
- the element 8 is illuminated from the side, in the region of the grating 12 , at an appropriate input angle, e.g., about 30 degrees, with a single input wavelength ⁇ (monochromatic) source, the diffracted (or reflected) beams 26 - 36 are generated.
- Other input angles ⁇ i may be used if desired, depending on various design parameters as discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application, and provided that a known diffraction equation (Eq.
- Eq. 1 is diffraction (or reflection or scatter) relationship between input wavelength ⁇ , input incident angle ⁇ i, output incident angle ⁇ o, and the spatial period ⁇ of the grating 12 .
- m is the “order” of the reflection being observed
- n is the refractive index of the substrate 10 .
- Eq. 1 applies to light incident on outer surfaces of the substrate 10 which are parallel to the longitudinal axis of the grating (or the k B vector). Because the angles ⁇ i, ⁇ o are defined outside the substrate 10 and because the effective refractive index of the substrate 10 is substantially a common value, the value of n in Eq. 1 cancels out of this equation.
- the angle ⁇ o of the reflected output light may be determined.
- ⁇ o sin ⁇ 1 ( ⁇ / ⁇ sin( ⁇ i ))
- the output light 27 should fall within an acceptable portion of the Bragg envelope (or normalized reflection efficiency envelope) curve 200 , as indicated by points 204 , 206 , also defined as a Bragg envelope angle ⁇ B, as also discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application.
- the curve 200 may be defined as: I ⁇ ( ki , ko ) ⁇ [ KD ] 2 ⁇ sin ⁇ ⁇ c 2 ⁇ [ ( ki - ko ) ⁇ D 2 ] Eq .
- the reflection efficiency I (Eqs. 3 & 4) is maximized, which is at the center or peak of the Bragg envelope.
- the input light angle is referred to as the Bragg angle as is known.
- the efficiency decreases for other input and output angles (i.e., ⁇ i # ⁇ ), as defined by Eqs. 3 & 4.
- the angle ⁇ i of the input light 24 should be set so that the angle ⁇ o of the reflected output light equals the input angle ⁇ i.
- the width of the sin(x)/x function increases and, the coefficient to or amplitude of the sinc 2 (or (sin(x)/x) 2 function (and thus the efficiency level across the Bragg envelope) also increases, and vice versa.
- the half-width of the Bragg envelope as well as the efficiency level across the Bragg envelope both decrease.
- ⁇ n should be made as large as possible to maximize the brightness, which allows D to be made smaller.
- ⁇ B ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ D ⁇ ⁇ sin ⁇ ( ⁇ i ) Eq . ⁇ 5
- ⁇ is a reflection efficiency factor which is the value for x in the sinc 2 (x) function where the value of sinc 2 (x) has decreased to a predetermined value from the maximum amplitude as indicated by points 204 , 206 on the curve 200 .
- the digital code may be generated by selectively creating individual index variations (or individual gratings) with the desired spatial periods ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n.
- Other illumination, readout techniques, types of gratings, geometries, materials, etc. may be used as discussed in the aforementioned patent application.
- FIG. 26 illustrations (a)-(c), for the grating 12 in a cylindrical substrate 10 having a sample spectral 17 bit code (i.e., 17 different pitches ⁇ 1 - ⁇ 17 ), the corresponding image on the CCD (Charge Coupled Device) camera 60 is shown for a digital pattern of 7 bits turned on (10110010001001001); 9 bits turned on of (1000101010100111); all 17 bits turned on of (11111111111111111).
- CCD Charge Coupled Device
- the length of the substrate 10 was 450 microns
- the outer diameter D 1 was 65 microns
- the inner diameter D was 14 microns
- ⁇ n for the grating 12 was about 10 ⁇ 4
- n 1 in portion 20 was about 1.458 (at a wavelength of about 1550 nm)
- n 2 in portion 18 was about 1.453
- the average pitch spacing ⁇ for the grating 12 was about 0.542 microns
- the spacing between pitches ⁇ was about 0.36% of the adjacent pitches ⁇ .
- the pitch ⁇ of an individual grating is the axial spatial period of the sinusoidal variation in the refractive index n 1 in the region 20 of the substrate 10 along the axial length of the grating 12 as indicated by a curve 90 on a graph 91 .
- a sample composite grating 12 comprises three individual gratings that are co-located on the substrate 10 , each individual grating having slightly different pitches, ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , respectively, and the difference (or spacing) ⁇ between each pitch ⁇ being about 3.0% of the period of an adjacent pitch ⁇ as indicated by a series of curves 92 on a graph 94 .
- FIG. 27 illustration (c), three individual gratings, each having slightly different pitches, ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , respectively, are shown, the difference AA between each pitch ⁇ being about 0.3% of the pitch ⁇ of the adjacent pitch as shown by a series of curves 95 on a graph 97 .
- the individual gratings in FIG. 27 , illustrations (b) and (c) are shown to all start at 0 for illustration purposes; however, it should be understood that, the separate gratings need not all start in phase with each other. Referring to FIG.
- the overlapping of the individual sinusoidal refractive index variation pitches ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n in the grating region 20 of the substrate 10 produces a combined resultant refractive index variation in the composite grating 12 shown as a curve 96 on a graph 98 representing the combination of the three pitches shown in FIG. 27 , illustration (b).
- the resultant refractive index variation in the grating region 20 of the substrate 10 may not be sinusoidal and is a combination of the individual pitches ⁇ (or index variation).
- the maximum number of resolvable bits N which is equal to the number of different grating pitches ⁇ (and hence the number of codes), that can be accurately read (or resolved) using side-illumination and side-reading of the grating 12 in the substrate 10 , is determined by numerous factors, including: the beam width w incident on the substrate (and the corresponding substrate length L and grating length Lg), the thickness or diameter D of the grating 12 , the wavelength ⁇ of incident light, the beam divergence angle ⁇ R , and the width of the Bragg envelope ⁇ B (discussed more in the aforementioned patent application), and may be determined by the equation: N ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ L 2 ⁇ ⁇ D ⁇ ⁇ sin ⁇ ( ⁇ i ) Eq . ⁇ 6
- the bits may be read/detected by providing a plurality of wavelengths and reading the wavelength spectrum of the reflected output light signal. In this case, there would be one bit per wavelength, and thus, the code is contained in the wavelength information of the reflected output signal.
- each bit (or ⁇ ) is defined by whether its corresponding wavelength falls within the Bragg envelope, not by its angular position within the Bragg envelope 200 .
- it is not limited by the number of angles that can fit in the Bragg envelope 200 for a given composite grating 12 , as in the embodiment discussed hereinbefore.
- the only limitation in the number of bits N is the maximum number of grating pitches ⁇ that can be superimposed and optically distinguished in wavelength space for the output beam.
- the reflection wavelength spectrum ( ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n) of the reflected output beam 310 will exhibit a series of reflection peaks 695 , each appearing at the same output Bragg angle ⁇ o.
- Each wavelength peak 695 ( ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n) corresponds to an associated spatial period ( ⁇ 1 - ⁇ n), which make up the grating 12 .
- One way to measure the bits in wavelength space is to have the input light angle ⁇ i equal to the output light angle ⁇ o, which is kept at a constant value, and to provide an input wavelength ⁇ that satisfies the diffraction condition (Eq. 1) for each grating pitch ⁇ . This will maximize the optical power of the output signal for each pitch ⁇ detected in the grating 12 .
- the transmission wavelength spectrum of the transmitted output beam 330 (which is transmitted straight through the grating 12 ) will exhibit a series of notches (or dark spots) 696 .
- the transmitted light 330 may be detected at the detector/reader 308 . It should be understood that the optical signal levels for the reflection peaks 695 and transmission notches 696 will depend on the “strength” of the grating 12 , i.e., the magnitude of the index variation n in the grating 12 .
- the bits may be detected by continuously scanning the input wavelength.
- a known optical source 300 provides the input light signal 24 of a coherent scanned wavelength input light shown as a graph 304 .
- the source 300 provides a sync signal on a line 306 to a known reader 308 .
- the sync signal may be a timed pulse or a voltage ramped signal, which is indicative of the wavelength being provided as the input light 24 to the substrate 10 at any given time.
- the reader 308 may be a photodiode, CCD camera, or other optical detection device that detects when an optical signal is present and provides an output signal on a line 309 indicative of the code in the substrate 10 or of the wavelengths present in the output light, which is directly related to the code, as discussed herein.
- the grating 12 reflects the input light 24 and provides an output light signal 310 to the reader 308 .
- the wavelength of the input signal is set such that the reflected output light 310 will be substantially in the center 314 of the Bragg envelope 200 for the individual grating pitch (or bit) being read.
- the source 300 may provide a continuous broadband wavelength input signal such as that shown as a graph 316 .
- the reflected output beam 310 signal is provided to a narrow band scanning filter 318 which scans across the desired range of wavelengths and provides a filtered output optical signal 320 to the reader 308 .
- the filter 318 provides a sync signal on a line 322 to the reader, which is indicative of which wavelengths are being provided on the output signal 320 to the reader and may be similar to the sync signal discussed hereinbefore on the line 306 from the source 300 .
- the source 300 does not need to provide a sync signal because the input optical signal 24 is continuous.
- the scanning filter may be located in the path of the input beam 24 as indicated by the dashed box 324 , which provides the sync signal on a line 323 .
- the reader 308 may be a known optical spectrometer (such as a known spectrum analyzer), capable of measuring the wavelength of the output light.
- each readout wavelength is associated with a predetermined number of bits within the Bragg envelope. Bits (or grating pitches ⁇ ) written for different wavelengths do not show up unless the correct wavelength is used.
- the bits can be read using one wavelength and many angles, many wavelengths and one angle, or many wavelengths and many angles.
- the grating 12 may have a thickness or depth D which is comparable or smaller than the incident beam wavelength ⁇ .
- This is known as a “thin” diffraction grating (or the full angle Bragg envelope is 180 degrees).
- the half-angle Bragg envelope ⁇ B is substantially 90 degrees; however, ⁇ n must be made large enough to provide sufficient reflection efficiency, per Eqs. 3 and 4.
- D* ⁇ n ⁇ /2 which corresponds to a ⁇ phase shift between adjacent minimum and maximum refractive index values of the grating 12 .
- phase shift between adjacent minimum and maximum refractive index values of the grating 12 should approach a ⁇ phase shift; however, other phase shifts may be used.
- the grating 12 is illuminated with the input light 24 oriented on a line 705 orthogonal to the longitudinal grating vector 705 .
- the +/ ⁇ 1 st order beams corresponds to output beams 700 , 702 , respectively.
- the +/ ⁇ 2 nd order beams corresponds to output beams 704 , 706 , respectively.
- the 0 th order (undefracted) beam corresponds to beam 708 and passes straight through the substrate.
- the output beams 700 - 708 project spectral spots or peaks 710 - 718 , respectively, along a common plane, shown from the side by a line 709 , which is parallel to the upper surface of the substrate 10 .
- one can use only the +/ ⁇ 1 st order (m +/ ⁇ 1) output beams for the code, in which case there would be only 2 peaks to detect, 712 , 714 .
- an individual peak may be used instead of using a pair of output peaks for a given order.
- the +/ ⁇ 1 st order beams corresponds to output beams 720 , 722 , respectively.
- the output beams 720 - 726 corresponding to the second pitch ⁇ 2 project spectral spots or peaks 730 - 736 , respectively, which are at a different location than the point 710 - 716 , but along the same common plane, shown from the side by the line 709 .
- each different pitch corresponds to a different elevation or output angle which corresponds to a predetermined set of spectral peaks. Accordingly, the presence or absence of a particular peak or set of spectral peaks defines the code.
- the readout angles may no longer be symmetric, leading to possible difficulties in readout.
- the angular sensitivity to the alignment of the longitudinal axis of the substrate 10 to the input angle ⁇ i of incident radiation is reduced or eliminated.
- the input light can be oriented along substantially any angle ⁇ i with respect to the grating 12 without causing output signal degradation, due the large Bragg angle envelope.
- the grating 12 can be oriented at any rotational (or azimuthal) angle without causing output signal degradation.
- changing the incident angle ⁇ i will affect the output angle ⁇ o of the reflected light in a predetermined predictable way, thereby allowing for accurate output code signal detection or compensation.
- the bits can also be multiplexed in an azimuthal (or rotational) angle ⁇ a of the substrate.
- a plurality of gratings 750 , 752 , 754 , 756 each having the same pitch ⁇ are disposed in a surface 701 of the substrate 10 and located in the plane of the substrate surface 701 .
- the input light 24 is incident on all the gratings 750 , 752 , 754 , 756 simultaneously.
- Each of the gratings provides output beams oriented based on the grating orientation.
- the grating 750 provides the output beams 764 , 762
- the grating 752 provides the output beams 766 , 768
- the grating 754 provides the output beams 770 , 772
- the grating 756 provides the output beams 774 , 776 .
- Each of the output beams provides spectral peaks or spots (similar to that discussed hereinbefore), which are located in a plane 760 that is parallel to the substrate surface plane 701 .
- a single grating pitch ⁇ can produce many bits depending on the number of gratings that can be placed at different azimuthal (rotational) angles on the surface of the substrate 10 and the number of output beam spectral peaks that can be spatially and optically resolved/detected.
- Each bit may be viewed as the presence or absence of a pair of peaks located at a predetermined location in space in the plane 760 .
- the azimuthal multiplexing can be combined with the elevation or output angle multiplexing discussed hereinbefore to provide two levels of multiplexing. Accordingly, for a thin grating, the number of bits can be multiplexed based on the number of grating pitches ⁇ and/or geometrically by the orientation of the grating pitches.
- the edges of the substrate 10 no longer scatter light from the incident angle into the “code angular space”, as discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application.
- a continuous broadband wavelength source may be used as the optical source if desired.
- the pitches ⁇ in the grating 12 may be created at a angle ⁇ g.
- the pitches when the input light 24 is incident normal to the surface 792 , will produce a reflected output beam 790 having an angle ⁇ o determined by Eq. 1 as adjusted for the blaze angle ⁇ g. This can provide another level of multiplexing bits in the code.
- an additional level of multiplexing may be provided by having the optical code use other numerical bases, if intensity levels of each bit are used to indicate code information. This could be achieved by having a corresponding magnitude (or strength) of the refractive index change ( ⁇ n) for each grating pitch ⁇ .
- Four intensity ranges are shown for each bit number or pitch ⁇ , providing for a Base-4 code (where each bit corresponds to 0,1,2, or 3). The lowest intensity level, corresponding to a 0, would exist when this pitch ⁇ is not present in the grating 12 .
- the next intensity level 450 would occur when a first low level ⁇ n 1 exists in the grating that provides an output signal within the intensity range corresponding to a 1.
- the next intensity level 452 would occur when a second higher level ⁇ n 2 exists in the grating 12 that provides an output signal within the intensity range corresponding to a 2.
- the next intensity level 452 would occur when a third higher level ⁇ n 3 exists in the grating 12 that provides an output signal within the intensity range corresponding to a 3.
- the input light 24 may be incident on the substrate 10 on an end face 600 of the substrate 10 .
- the input light 24 will be incident on the grating 12 having a more significant component of the light (as compared to side illumination discussed hereinbefore) along the longitudinal grating axis 207 of the grating (along the grating vector k B ), as shown by a line 602 .
- the light 602 reflects off the grating 12 as indicated by a line 604 and exits the substrate as output light 608 .
- the code information is readable only in the spectral wavelength of the reflected beam, similar to that discussed hereinbefore for wavelength based code reading.
- the input signal in this case may be a scanned wavelength source or a broadband wavelength source.
- the code information may be obtained in reflection from the reflected beam 614 or in transmission by the transmitted beam 616 that passes through the grating 12 .
- n in is the refractive index of the first (input) medium
- n out is the refractive index of the second (output) medium
- ⁇ in and ⁇ out are measured from a line 620 normal to an incident surface 622 .
- the grating region 20 of the substrate 10 will act as a known optical waveguide for certain wavelengths.
- the grating region 20 acts as a “core” along which light is guided and the outer region 18 acts as a “cladding” which helps confine or guide the light.
- such a waveguide will have a known “numerical aperture” ( ⁇ na) that will allow light that is within the aperture ⁇ na to be directed or guided along the grating axis 207 and reflected axially off the grating 12 and returned and guided along the waveguide.
- the grating 12 will reflect light having the appropriate wavelengths equal to the pitches ⁇ present in the grating 12 back along the region 20 (or core) of the waveguide, and pass the remaining wavelengths of light as the light 632 .
- having the grating region 20 act as an optical waveguide for wavelengths reflected by the grating 12 allows incident light that is not aligned exactly with the grating axis 207 to be guided along and aligned with the grating 12 axis 207 for optimal grating reflection.
- any standard waveguide may be used, e.g., a standard telecommunication single mode optical fiber (125 micron diameter or 80 micron diameter fiber with about a 8-10 micron diameter), or a larger diameter waveguide (greater than 0.5 mm diameter), such as is describe in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/455,868, filed Dec. 6, 1999, entitled “Large Diameter Waveguide, Grating”.
- any type of optical waveguide may be used for the optical substrate 10 , such as, a multi-mode, birefringent, polarization maintaining, polarizing, multi-core, multi-cladding, or microsturctured optical waveguide, or a flat or planar waveguide (where the waveguide is rectangular shaped), or other waveguides. Any other dimensions may be used for the waveguide if desired, provided they meet the functional and performance requirements of the application taking into account the teachings herein.
- the substrate 10 does not behave as a waveguide for the incident or reflected light and the incident light 24 will be diffracted (or reflected) as indicated by lines 642 , and the codes detected as discussed hereinbefore for the end-incidence condition discussed hereinbefore with FIG. 45 , and the remaining light 640 passes straight through.
- illustration (b) alternatively, the input light 24 may be incident from the side and, if the grating 12 has the appropriate blaze angle, the reflected light will exit from the end face 652 as indicated by a line 654 .
- the grating 12 may have a plurality of different pitch angles 660 , 662 , which reflect the input light 24 to different output angles as indicated by lines 664 , 666 . This provides another level of multiplexing (spatially) additional codes, if desired.
- the grating 12 may be impressed in the substrate 10 by any technique for writing, impressed, embedded, imprinted, or otherwise forming a diffraction grating in the volume of or on a surface of a substrate 10 .
- Examples of some known techniques are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,725,110 and 4,807,950, entitled “Method for Impressing Gratings Within Fiber Optics”, to Glenn et al; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,388,173, entitled “Method and Apparatus for Forming Aperiodic Gratings in Optical Fibers”, to Glenn, respectively, and U.S. Pat. No.
- the grating 12 may be partially or totally created by etching or otherwise altering the outer surface geometry of the substrate to create a corrugated or varying surface geometry of the substrate, such as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,891,302, entitled “Method of Filtering Modes in Optical Waveguides”, to Dabby et al, which is incorporated herein by reference to the extent necessary to understand the present invention, provided the resultant optical refractive profile for the desired code is created.
- the grating 12 may be made by depositing dielectric layers onto the substrate, similar to the way a known thin film filter is created, so as to create the desired resultant optical refractive profile for the desired code.
- FIGS. 39 - 50 Alternative Microbead Geometries
- the substrate 10 (and/or the element 8 ) may have end-view cross-sectional shapes other than circular, such as square, rectangular, elliptical, clam-shell, D-shaped, or other shapes, and may have side-view sectional shapes other than rectangular, such as circular, square, elliptical, clam-shell, D-shaped, or other shapes.
- 3D geometries other than a cylinder may be used, such as a sphere, a cube, a pyramid or any other 3D shape.
- the substrate 10 may have a geometry that is a combination of one or more of the foregoing shapes.
- the shape of the element 8 and the size of the incident beam may be made to minimize any end scatter off the end face(s) of the element 8 , as is discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application. Accordingly, to minimize such scatter, the incident beam 24 may be oval shaped where the narrow portion of the oval is smaller than the diameter D 1 , and the long portion of the oval is smaller than the length L of the element 8 . Alternatively, the shape of the end faces may be rounded or other shapes or may be coated with an antireflective coating.
- any given dimension for the region 20 of the grating 12 may be less than any corresponding dimension of the substrate 10 .
- the grating 12 may be embedded within or part of a much larger substrate 12 .
- the element 8 may be embedded or formed in or on a larger object for identification of the object.
- the dimensions, geometries, materials, and material properties of the substrate 10 are selected such that the desired optical and material properties are met for a given application.
- the resolution and range for the optical codes are scalable by controlling these parameters as discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application.
- the substrate 10 may have an outer coating 799 , such as a polymer or other material that may be dissimilar to the material of the substrate 10 , provided that the coating 799 on at least a portion of the substrate, allows sufficient light to pass through the substrate for adequate optical detection of the code.
- the coating 799 may be on any one or more sides of the substrate 10 .
- the coating 799 may be a material that causes the element 8 to float or sink in certain fluids (liquid and/or gas) solutions.
- the substrate 10 may be made of a material that is less dense than certain fluid (liquids and/or gas) solutions, thereby allowing the elements 8 to float or be buoyant or partially buoyant.
- the substrate may be made of a porous material, such as controlled pore glass (CPG) or other porous material, which may also reduce the density of the element 8 and may make the element 8 buoyant or partially-buoyant in certain fluids.
- CPG controlled pore glass
- the grating 12 is axially spatially invariant.
- the substrate 10 with the grating 12 shown as a long substrate 21
- each substrate 30 - 36 will contain the same code as the longer substrate 21 had before it was cut.
- the limit on the size of the smaller substrates 30 - 36 is based on design and performance factors discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application.
- one purpose of the outer region 18 (or region without the grating 12 ) of the substrate 10 is to provide mechanical or structural support for the inner grating region 20 .
- the entire substrate 10 may comprise the grating 12 , if desired.
- the support portion may be completely or partially beneath, above, or along one or more sides of the grating region 20 , such as in a planar geometry, or a D-shaped geometry, or other geometries, as described herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application.
- the non-grating portion 18 of the substrate 10 may be used for other purposes as well, such as optical lensing effects or other effects (discussed herein or in the aforementioned patent application).
- the end faces of the substrate 10 need not be perpendicular to the sides or parallel to each other. However, for applications where the elements 8 are stacked end-to-end, the packing density may be optimized if the end faces are perpendicular to the sides.
- two or more substrates 10 , 250 may be attached together to form the element 8 , e.g., by an adhesive, fusing or other attachment techniques.
- the gratings 12 , 252 may have the same or different codes.
- the substrate 10 may have multiple regions 80 , 90 and one or more of these regions may have gratings in them.
- the substrate 10 may have multiple regions 80 , 90 and one or more of these regions may have gratings in them.
- the length L of the element 8 may be shorter than its diameter D, thus, having a geometry such as a plug, puck, wafer, disc or plate.
- the substrate 10 may have a plurality of the gratings 12 having the same codes written therein at numerous different angular or rotational (or azimuthal) positions of the substrate 10 .
- two gratings 550 , 552 having axial grating axes 551 , 553 , respectively may have a common central (or pivot or rotational) point where the two axes 551 , 553 intersect.
- the angle ⁇ i of the incident light 24 is aligned properly with the grating 550 and is not aligned with the grating 552 , such that output light 555 is reflected off the grating 550 and light 557 passes through the grating 550 as discussed herein. If the element 8 is rotated as shown by the arrows 559 , the angle ⁇ i of incident light 24 will become aligned properly with the grating 552 and not aligned with the grating 550 such that output light 555 is reflected off the grating 552 and light 557 passes through the grating 552 .
- the bead When multiple gratings are located in this rotational orientation, the bead may be rotated as indicated by a line 559 and there may be many angular positions that will provide correct (or optimal) incident input angles ⁇ i to the grating. While this example shows a circular cross-section, this technique may be used with any shape cross-section.
- illustrations (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) the substrate 10 may have one or more holes located within the substrate 10 .
- holes 560 may be located at various points along all or a portion of the length of the substrate 10 . The holes need not pass all the way through the substrate 10 . Any number, size and spacing for the holes 560 may be used if desired.
- holes 572 may be located very close together to form a honeycomb-like area of all or a portion of the cross-section.
- one (or more) inner hole 566 may be located in the center of the substrate 10 or anywhere inside of where the grating region(s) 20 are located.
- the inner hole 566 may be coated with a reflective coating 573 to reflect light to facilitate reading of one or more of the gratings 12 and/or to reflect light diffracted off one or more of the gratings 12 .
- the incident light 24 may reflect off the grating 12 in the region 20 and then reflect off the surface 573 to provide output light 577 .
- the incident light 24 may reflect off the surface 573 , then reflect off the grating 12 and provide the output light 575 .
- the grating region 20 may run axially or circumferentially 571 around the substrate 10 .
- the holes 579 may be located circumferentially around the grating region 20 or transversely across the substrate 10 .
- the grating 12 may be located circumferentially around the outside of the substrate 10 , and there may be holes 574 inside the substrate 10 .
- the substrate 10 may have one or more protruding portions or teeth 570 , 578 , 580 extending radially and/or circumferentially from the substrate 10 .
- the teeth 570 , 578 , 580 may have any other desired shape.
- the grating region 20 may have end cross-sectional shapes other than circular and may have side cross-sectional shapes other than rectangular, such as any of the geometries described herein for the substrate 10 .
- the grating region 20 may have a oval cross-sectional shape as shown by dashed lines 581 , which may be oriented in a desired direction, consistent with the teachings herein. Any other geometries for the substrate 10 or the grating region 20 may be used if desired, as described herein.
- At least a portion of a side of the substrate 10 may be coated with a reflective coating to allow incident light 510 to be reflected back to the same side from which the incident light came, as indicated by reflected light 512 .
- the substrate 10 can be electrically and/or magnetically polarized, by a dopant or coating, which may be used to ease handling and/or alignment or orientation of the substrate 10 and/or the grating 12 , or used for other purposes.
- the bead may be coated with conductive material, e.g., metal coating on the inside of a holy substrate, or metallic dopant inside the substrate. In these cases, such materials can cause the substrate 10 to align in an electric or magnetic field.
- the substrate can be doped with an element or compound that fluoresces or glows under appropriate illumination, e.g., a rare earth dopant, such as Erbium, or other rare earth dopant or fluorescent or luminescent molecule.
- a rare earth dopant such as Erbium, or other rare earth dopant or fluorescent or luminescent molecule.
- fluorescence or luminescence may aid in locating and/or aligning substrates.
- the bead cell, chamber, or cuvettes 900 , 920 may be segmented into regions each associated with a different reaction or used for a different identification process/application.
- the cell may have a plurality of separate sections 902 which are physically separated from each other by barriers, 904 .
- the beads may be loaded through separate holes or ports 906 , which communicate only with an associated section 902 .
- the sections 902 may be mechanically isolated, so that the beads 8 placed in a given section 902 all remain in that section, and/or fluidically isolated, so that any fluid with the beads 8 placed in a given section 902 remains in that section with no cross-over into any other section 902 .
- the cell 940 may have a plurality of separate sections 942 which are physically separated from each other by barriers, 944 .
- the beads may be loaded through separate holes or ports 946 , which communicate only with an associated section 942 .
- the sections 942 may be mechanically isolated, so that the beads 8 placed in a given section 942 all remain in that section, and/or fluidically isolated, so that any fluid with the beads 8 placed in a given section 942 remains in that section with no cross-over into any other section 942 .
- a sectored cell 920 with straight grooves 205 has a base groove plate 930 , a spacer 932 , and a cover 934 .
- the groove plate may be made of fused silica, borosilicate glass, or plastic, acrylic, Zeonex made by Zeon Corp. or any other support material that is transparent or substantially transparent to desired incident wavelength light or can be made of reflective by coating a transparent material or using a reflective material, such as silicon or other support material that reflects the desired wavelengths of incident light.
- the groove plate 930 may be made of a material that has minimal fluorescence to minimize background fluorescence in the desired fluorescence wavelength range, for applications where fluorescence of the beads 8 is measured.
- the base plate 930 has a substantially circular shape having a diameter of about 100 mm, with a mechanical alignment key or notch 952 about 32.5 mm long, which may be used for mechanical alignment during wafer fabrication of the groove plate 930 .
- the thickness 948 is about 1 mm.
- the base plate 930 has the grooves 205 therein, which may be formed by direct reactive ion etching (REI) of the glass base plate 930 , photo-patterning with photoresist, photoresist and plating process, or any other process that provides the grooves 205 that meet the requirements for the application.
- the sectors 944 have a length 950 of about 50 mm.
- each grooved section or sector 944 is about 7 mm and the space 946 between each section 944 is about 2 mm.
- the grooves 205 are about 34 microns by 24 microns deep and have about a 55 micron pitch spacing. For a 7 mm long groove, each groove 205 would hold about 28 cylindrically shaped beads 8 each bead 8 having a dimension of about 30 microns in diameter and 250 microns in length.
- the sectors 944 having a length of about 50 mm may have about 900 grooves and hold a total capacity about 25,200 beads 8 . While the number of physically separated sectors 944 in the cell 938 shown is eight, any number of sectors may be used if desired.
- the side walls 958 may have an angle ⁇ g of about 0 to 10 degrees. Other angles may be used, depending on the application, e.g., whether the beads will be removed from the plate and how they will be removed.
- the beads may be flushed or washed out of the grooves 205 with fluid flow transversely across the top of the grooves 205 , using a fluid flow rate of about 3 to 6 ml/second cleans out the beads.
- the flush may be done with dionized water, regular water, saline, detergent with water, or other liquid. Using a detergent reduces the viscosity and surface tension so beads do not stick to the surface of the cell.
- the angle ⁇ g may be greater than 10 degrees if desired, depending on certain design parameters, including, flush flow rate, groove-to-groove separation, and groove depth. Alternatively, if the angle ⁇ g is less than 0 deg., the beads will be more likely to stay in the grooves 205 .
- groove plate 930 Other dimensions and geometries for the groove plate 930 , grooves 205 , spacer 932 , and cover 934 and/or for any features or characteristics thereof may be used if desired.
- the present invention which is predicated on two observations, eliminates the need for mechanically distributing beads.
- the first observation is that small particles are easily moved by a fluid stream, and the orientation of cylindrical particles is generally with the long axis of the particle perpendicular to the direction of the flow.
- the second is that particles in a liquid can be moved in a particular direction by a temporally asymmetric oscillatory flow.
- the flow rates were reversed, i.e. when the outgoing wave was slower than the return wave, the particles moved inward. Again it was observed that the particles would tend to orient perpendicular to the direction of the pressure wave.
- FIG. 1 ( a - f ), illustrating how the particles form a ring shaped pattern and how the size of the ring increased, indicating that the particles were moving outward, after a series of pulses were applied in one direction.
- FIG. 1 ( a - f )
- An important feature of the cell was an air buffer around the perimeter of the cell to allow the fluid a place to move, since the fluid itself is non-compressible, the air gap acted as a pneumatic spring. Another important feature was the space between the floor and ceiling. It was important to maintain a small gap ( ⁇ 500 um) between the floor and the ceiling to keep the velocity of the fluid in the cell high enough to move the particles.
- FIG. 11 shows a schematic of a concept that uses two such flow-generating tips.
- the flow from the tips can be operated such that they oppose each other, thus acting to push the beads into the region half way between the tips. Or they can be operated in a push-pull fashion whereby the beads tend to move toward one tip or the other.
- a synthetic circular force field can be generated by rotating the plate while operating the tips in either of the previously mentioned methods.
- An of the invention involves combining the ability to transport beads across the floor of a substrate using either continuous fluid flow or a type of asymmetric oscillatory flow, with the technology for trapping beads, such as the previously described groove plate. This would enable a highly efficient assembly of beads with precise orientations in the smallest possible area. With respect to reduced operating cost and high throughput, all three of these attributes are important elements of a commercial encoded particle reader.
- FIG. 70 shows a schematic of a concept that incorporates a closed liquid cell and the elements required to load the cell efficiently.
- Key elements of the method include: a closed cell including a top and a bottom, the bottom contains a plate with grooves for aligning beads, both the top and the bottom are transparent, the top has an opening in the center for loading beads and for coupling a pressure generating device such as a bellows or a tube, and finally a region of trapped air around the perimeter adjacent to and in contact with the fluid in the cell.
- the loading operation consists of: filling the cell with a liquid such as water, spinning the cell to remove the air bubbles, dispensing beads through the center hole in the lid, applying a pulsating flow such that the rate of the outward going pulse is higher the return pulse. This will tend to move the pile of beads away from the center of the cell.
- the beads move outward they populate the grooves.
- the direction of the pulsation can be reversed to move the pile of beads back toward the center to enhance the probability that the grooves are fully populated before allowing beads to move out to a larger radius.
- By moving the beads in and out it should be possible to fully populate the inner most grooves, thus maximizing the overall loading density.
- FIGS. 77-79 for “puffing” (pressure pulses) done with straight grooves with the actuator on one end.
- the beads may be unloaded by flushing with fluid as shown and discussed herein before.
- the groove plate may be cylindrical shaped.
- the grooves 205 may run along the longitudinal axis as shown in FIGS. 62,63 or circumferentially as shown in FIGS. 64,65 .
- the grooves 205 may be oriented in any other direction along the cylindrical groove if desired.
- the grooves 205 may be located on the outside of the cylinder as shown in FIGS. 62,64 .
- the grooves 205 may be located on the inside of the cylinder as shown in FIGS. 63,65 .
- the cylinder may be spun about the longitudinal axis to locate the beads 8 within the grooves 205 .
- the orientation of the longitudinal axis of the cylinder may be such that the longitudinal axis is vertical or horizontal or at any other desired angle.
- an apparatus for transporting microbeads for the present invention includes a container or well 400 with a sealed lid 410 having microbeads 8 and liquid 412 therein and a second container 402 having a sealed lid 411 with liquid 412 therein.
- Two tubes 406 , 408 penetrate the lid 410 , the first tube 406 connects the first container 400 to a pump 416 and the second tube 408 connects the first container to the second container 402 for receiving the beads from the first container 200 .
- the first container 400 is filled with a liquid 412 , and one end or tip 414 of the first tube 406 is in the liquid 412 a predetermined distance into the container 400 , e.g., 20% to 50% of the full depth of the container.
- a tip 409 of the tube 408 is mounted substantially flush with the bottom surface of the lid 410 .
- the pump 416 pumps liquid 412 from a reservoir 405 into the tube 406 to the first container 400 .
- the beads 8 are agitated as indicated by the lines 418 .
- the liquid 412 and the beads 8 exit the container 400 through the tube 408 as indicated by a line 420 and are emptied into the container 402 .
- the liquid 412 enters the container 402 and exits the container 402 through a filter 424 then through a tube 428 , as indicated by a line 426 .
- the filter 424 prevents the beads 8 from exiting the container 402 .
- the liquid 412 that exits the container 402 is dispensed via the tube 428 into a waste pan or container 430 .
- a vacuum pump 432 may draw a vacuum on the tube 428 .
- the tube 406 would be open ended. We have found that this technique transports all the beads 8 from the container 400 to the second container 402 .
- the tip 409 of the tube 408 may be placed further into the container (i.e., not flush with inner surface of the lid 410 ), if desired. In that case, some air may be pumped along the tube 408 with the liquid and the beads 8 . If air exists at the top of the container 400 , the beads 8 may stick to the wall or inner surface of the lid 410 and not be transported to the other container 402 .
- the second container 402 may be an open container. In that case, the container 402 should have sufficient volume to receive the fluid from the pump 416 .
- the container may have a volume that is large enough such that when the beads 8 enter from the tube 408 , they stay substantially near the bottom of the container 402 and do not get sucked out of the tube 428 to the waste container 430 .
- This technique for transporting the beads 8 may be referred to as the “telegraph” technique.
- the seal between the lids 410 , 411 and the containers 400 , 402 may be any type of seal that retains the liquid inside the container, e.g., a radial seal/inner surface seal on the inside wall of the container, a top surface/axial seal to the top surface of the container, or any other seal that will perform the function required.
- the lid 410 is a probe head which comes down on top of the well to create a seal on the well.
- the probe would contain the two tubes 406 , 406 , the tube 406 would be an aspirate tube and the tube 408 would be a dispense tube for dispensing or transporting the beads 8 from the first container 400 to the second container 402 .
- the system can operate under pressure or a vacuum.
- the liquid 412 is driven into the dispense line, pressurizing the well and sending the fluid out of the aspirate tube 408 .
- This permits use of drive pressure greater than 1 atm.
- the aspirate tube 408 is connected to negative pressure, and drive pressure is limited to 1 atmosphere. However, in that case, if a seal fails, air leaks into the system instead of liquid (and possibly beads) leaking out.
- FIG. 92 a similar configuration to that shown in FIG. 91 , using a syringe pump.
- FIGS. 93-97 various alternative configurations for pulling or pushing the beads 8 out of a well 440 having a sealed lid 446 , through a tube 442 , to a larger diameter holding area 440 , using a syringe pump 448 .
- the lid 446 is removed from the container 440 and placed in the target or destination well or container (not shown).
- two tips penetrate the upper seal on the container as discussed hereinbefore, with one tip connected to a syringe pump and the other connected to a reservoir.
- a syringe pump When the syringe pump is aspirated, fluid will be pulled from the reservoir through the second tip. The fluid is thus dispensed from the second tip, agitating the slurry, and aspirated by the first tip.
- the dispensing head is then moved to the new location desired. To dispense the beads, flow is reversed. The flow rate is set lower to avoid re-aspirating the beads into the reservoir.
- the volume can be set much lower to simply dispense the beads into a new well.
- the volume can be set the same, however, to refill the reservoir to the original volume.
- the actuation direction can be reversed.
- the second tip can be connected to a pump, while the first tip is connected to the reservoir. When fluid is dispensed under pressure through the second tip, fluid will flow up through the first tip, providing an effective aspiration. Re-dispense then involves aspiration through the second tip.
- a fluidic circuit for loading beads 8 from wells 400 in a known multi-well plate e.g., a 96 well plate having 8 rows and 12 columns
- a multi-segmented bead cell/chamber such as is discussed in copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0082 PR) and copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0086 PR) is shown.
- This system uses an air pump to create a vacuum to pull the beads into the cell 402 (second container) from the wells 400 (first container).
- source fluid is contained in reagent bottles.
- a bottle is selected by opening the valve which leads by a tubing connection through the bottle cap to the desired bottle.
- Three bottles are shown, actuated by valves V 1 , V 2 and V 3 . Additional bottles could be added, each with a companion valve. All valves are electrically operated solenoid valves, such as clean valves sold by Takasago Corp.
- Valve V 6 is ideally a tubing pinch type valve for reliability as beads may damage a conventional solenoid valve.
- the prime mover in this embodiment is an air pump, such as that made by Boxer Corp., which creates a vacuum condition in a pressure vessel that acts as a vacuum trap. Fluid is then pulled into this container when valve V 6 is open.
- a liquid pump can serve as the prime mover.
- a filter should be placed in front of the pump to block beads from entering the pump.
- the pressure vessel is unnecessary as an unsealed waste container can be used.
- a syringe pump such as that sold by Kloehn Inc., can serve as the prime mover (as shown in FIG. 94 ).
- a filter should be placed in front of the syringe pump to block beads from entering the syringe.
- a three way valve must be used with the syringe pump so that after filling the syringe, fluid the valve can be switched to then dump fluid to waste. If a syringe pump is used, the pressure vessel is unnecessary as an unsealed waste container can be used.
- valve state table shown as Table 1 below to describe the process of filling the cell, begin with a null state of all valves closed and the pump off.
- the pump is turned on to stabilize a vacuum condition in the pressure vessel.
- One of valves V 1 , V 2 or V 3 is opened.
- Valve V 4 is opened to direct fluid into the cell.
- Valve V 6 is opened, thereby pulling fluid from the reagent bottles, through the cell and into the pressure vessel.
- Valve V 6 controls the fill cycle time and is held open for a specified length of time, e.g., 1 second, calibrated to pull the desired volume of fluid through the cell.
- a bubble sensor such as that made by Introtek, may be used to aid in filling the cell with fluid, by ensuring that the fluid line is free of air before ending the fill cycle.
- the bubble sensor may also be used to detect if air is being pulled into the cell or system by an improperly seated lid 410 or other air leak.
- An optional bubble sensor may also be used near the reagent bottles to detect when one of the reagent bottles are empty.
- a level sensor such as that made by The Madison Company, in each reagent bottle may be used instead of the bubble sensor to detect empty bottles.
- another level sensor may be used to in the waste container to detect a full containter.
- valve V 6 closed and V 4 open, to move beads from the well plate into the cell, valve V 4 is closed and either valve V 5 or valve V 7 is opened.
- Valve V 7 is only used if the single well to 8 output divider is intended to be used.
- Valve V 6 is opened, thereby pulling fluid from the reagent bottles, into the sealed well plate, out the well plate into the cell, pushing fluid out of the cell into the pressure vessel. Beads are pulled along with the fluid from the well plate into the cell. While excess fluid exits the cell, the beads remain due to the manifold design within the cell.
- Cycle time is set longer, e.g., 2 to 5 seconds, for flush than for filling the cell, as several volume changes are desired to clean fluid and beads from the cell.
- the flush volume is several times greater than the volume held within the cell, and the fluid velocity is high, the beads are propelled out of the cell, pass through valve V 6 and enter the pressure vessel.
- a filter in the pressure vessel can be used to capture the beads.
- Standard household or industrial water filter housing makes an excellent pressure vessel, as does bag filter housing, such as the Giant Bag Housings by MetPro Corporation, Keystone Filter Division.
- FIG. 99 an alternative fluidic circuit for loading beads 8 from wells 400 in a known multi-well plate (e.g., a 96 well plate having 8 rows and 12 columns) to a multi-segmented bead cell/chamber is shown.
- the bead cell is similar to that described in copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0082 PR) and/or copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0086 PR).
- This system uses an air pump to create a vacuum to pull the beads into the cell 402 (second container) from the wells 400 (first container).
- This system also uses a 3-way valve to route the various fluids into the cell 402 or into the wells 400 .
- FIG. 100 an alternative fluidic circuit for loading beads 8 from wells 400 in a known multi-well plate (e.g., a 96 well plate having 8 rows and 12 columns) to a multi-segmented bead cell/chamber 402 is shown.
- the bead cell is similar to that described in copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0082 PR) and/or copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0086 PR).
- This system uses an air pump to create a vacuum to pull the beads into the cell 402 (second container) from the wells 400 (first container).
- This system also uses a cell having a filter or frit as described in the aforementioned patent application to help collect the beads at the entry of the cell prior to distributing the beads across the cell for reading.
- FIGS. 101-102 an example of an O-ring sealed lid 410 that fits on top of the well (or first container) 400 that would contain the beads 8 .
- FIG. 102 shows a head having eight lids 410 , one for each well of an eight row well plate and the tubes 406 , 408 , as well as a housing to which they are all mounted.
- FIG. 110 a cross-section of a head having 8 lids 410 , engaged with eight wells, and also showing a housing and springs and the tubes 406 , 408 .
- a fluidic circuit for loading beads 8 from wells 400 in a known multi-well plate e.g., a 96 well plate having 8 rows and 12 columns
- a multi-segmented bead cell/chamber 402 similar to that described herein with FIGS. 98 and 99 , except that this system uses a pipetting technique instead of a “telegraph” technique for moving the beads.
- the pipette is placed in a well 400 and beads are extracted into the pipette tip. Then the pipette tip is moved and inserted into a pipette port on the cell 402 .
- this embodiment uses a 3-way valve for flow management.
- FIGS. 108-109 instead of moving beads from one well to one of the sectored cells in the cell 402 , a 1 to 8 flow manifold may be used to distribute beads from one well to eight separated sectors in the cell.
- FIG. 109 ( a ) is a perspective view and FIG. 109 ( b ) is a side cross-section view of the 1 to 8 fluid manifold.
- This 1 to 8 manifold is also shown as one option in the fluidics schematic if FIG. 98 .
- the 1 to 8 manifold may be used to move fluid (with or without beads) from one well or port to 8 wells or port or used in as an 8 to 1 manifold to move fluid (with our without beads) from 8 wells or ports to 1 well or port.
- one technique for pipetting a predetermined number of the beads 8 from a well 462 is as follows:
- buffer solution e.g., SSC, SDS, or any other buffer solution or desired fluid in a vial or well 462 .
- the pipette tip should be inserted into the liquid 462 such that the pipette tip is near the top of the liquid when the fluid is fully aspirated. Therefore, as the liquid level decreases from successive aspirations, the tip will need to be placed deeper into the vial each time a new group of beads is removed. Also, the size of the opening in the pipette tip opening/orifice determines the velocity of the mixing currents for a given agitation volume and rate. For example, a larger orifice will result in lower velocities for the same rate and volume.
- a tip with a small orifice ( ⁇ about 600 um) works well for the 28 ⁇ 250 micron beads, solution and volume used. However, the tip orifice should not be so small ( ⁇ about 300 um) that the flow through the tip for the pressure generated and decreased to the point where the velocities are too low to generate good mixing and suspension of the beads.
- the next (final) aspiration of beads 8 should determine how many of the beads 8 are drawn from the vial 460 .
- the number of beads 8 drawn concentration (beads/ul) ⁇ aspiration volume (ul).
- Dispensing the beads 8 into the target well 468 should include a brief time delay of about 1-3 sec to allow the beads 8 to fall to the bottom of the pipette tip before they are completely dispensed into the target well 468 .
- the vial 460 starting with the vial 460 with about 1000 beads having a diameter of about 28 microns and a length of about 250 microns, in about 1000 microliters of known buffer solution 462 , e.g., SCC,SDS.
- a pipette tip 464 into the liquid 462 such that the pipette tip is near the top of the liquid when the fluid is fully aspirated.
- aspirate/dispense about 4 times with about 150 microliters over a period of about 4 seconds; however other times may be used provided sufficient bead mixing and suspension is achieved.
- the size of the opening in the pipette tip was 400 microns (0.4 mm) and the size of the well 460 was about 1000 micron liters, and the pipette tip was placed about mid way between the center of the well 460 and the side wall.
- FIG. 105 a picture of a Hamilton Syringe Pump syringe pump used to pipette beads with the present invention is shown.
- the pump having a storage buffer of 1 ⁇ SSC, 0.1% SDS, and using 200 microliter ultrafine points (VWR) pipette tips.
- VWR microliter ultrafine points
- FIG. 106 a graph of syringe pump bead pipetting results is shown using the process described herein. For 36 tests, the average number of beads removed each time was 18, with a bead diameter of about 28 microns and length of 250 microns, agitation volume of 150 microliters, final aspiration volume of 27 microliters, and a starting bead concentration of 0.68 beads per microliter.
- a plurality of containers or wells 500 - 504 are provided, each well having beads with a specific code.
- the well 500 has beads 8 with a code of 345 , as shown by the digital representation image 506
- the well 502 has beads 8 having the code of 8197 , as shown by the digital representation image 508
- the well 504 has beads 8 having the code of 15606, as shown by the digital representation image 510 .
- the plurality of wells 500 - 504 having the beads 8 can create Multiplex Bead Kits 1 through N, each Kit in a separate container 516 - 520 , and each Kit having a predetermined number of any one or more of the codes in the wells 500 - 504 .
- the beads 8 may be transported from the wells 500 - 504 using the any embodiment of the present invention or using any technique now known or later developed to move a predetermined number the beads 8 into the containers 516 - 520 for the Kits.
- the predetermined number of beads 8 of each code in each kit may have a tolerance, e.g., +/ ⁇ 10 beads. Other bead kit tolerances may be used depending on the application. Referring to FIGS.
- a method for making a “kit” consisting of N unique codes, where N may range from 1 to 5000, represented by M replicates (beads), where M may range from 5-100 can be accomplished by a two step process, consisting of transferring a small number (M) of beads from a vial or well containing beads of all the same code to a target well or vial, then, combining the small number of beads representing each code in the kit to a single vial or well, thus forming the “kit”.
- the first step, transferring M beads from the source could be performed in a 48 , 96 or 384 well format using the pipetting approach previously described, or from an arbitrary configuration of individual vials.
- the second step of combining individual sets of N codes together to form the final “kit” may be accomplished by either dispensing the individual sets into a funnel-like device where the beads are flushed into a single well or vial containing a filter bottom such that copious amounts of fluid may be used to sufficiently flush all the beads through the funnel, leaving substantially no beads behind.
- Another approach, which accomplishes the combining effect, is to “telegraph” (previously described) the beads representing individual codes into a single vial or well all at once. This process is very fast and highly efficient in terms of transferring all the beads from the source to the destination. This two-step process would enable “kits” to be made with an arbitrary number of codes and represented by an arbitrary number of beads per code, in a rapid and efficient manner.
- FIG. 115 shows a perspective view of the 8 sector bead cell having 8 input tubes 408 which transport beads and fluid from 8 cells to 8 corresponding sectors of the bead cell. It also shows a 1 to 8 flow manifold which takes in fluid and distributes it to 8 sectors in the cell.
- FIG. 111 shows a multi-well plate having beads which are pipetted individually to another multi-well plate which are then telegraphed as a group of wells (as described herein) to a filter well Kit container.
- FIG. 112 shows a multi-well plate having beads which are pipetted as a predetermined group or individual pipette tips to another multi-well plate, which are then telegraphed as a group of wells (as described herein) to a filter well Kit container.
- FIG. 112 shows a multi-well plate having beads which are pipetted as a predetermined group or individual pipette tips to another multi-well plate, which are then telegraphed as a group of wells (as described herein) to a filter well Kit container.
- FIG. 113 shows an 8 to 1 manifold for receiving 8 pipette tips which will simultaneously dispense fluid and beads into the manifold and the manifold combines the received fluid and beads to a single output port which dispenses the fluid and beads into the Kit container having a filter on the bottom to catch the beads. The beads are then transferred to a final kitting container.
- FIG. 114 shows a pipetting machine having a flush port for flushing fluid through the pipette tip, which can be used after the beads 8 are dispensed into the manifold shown in FIG. 113 , or whenever flushing with a fluid is needed.
- the Kit container may have a filter on the bottom to catch the beads and allow the fluid to exit.
- the beads are then transferred to a final kitting container.
- the container may be large enough to hold the fluid and the beads and then the beads and a portion of the fluid may be transported (e.g., by the telegraph method described herein) to a smaller kit container if needed.
- FIGS. 118-133 show an alternative embodiment of the present invention.
- FIGS. 118-121 show the basic achitecture and governing design principles
- FIGS. 122 a to 125 show steps of the overall method and the sequencing thereof
- FIG. 126 shows details related to a groove plate design
- FIGS. 127 a - d show basic experiments
- FIGS. 128-133 show more detailed diagrams of components of the basic architecture.
- the microbead platform will perform biological assays on beads by attaching a type of biomolecule to the beads then placing the beads in a vessel containing sample material, which will react in varying degrees to the biomolecules.
- the extent to which the sample reacts is determined by measuring the intensity of a fluorescent tag molecule, and the indentity of the fluorescent beads is determined by reading its holographic code. Both fluorescence and code detection methods place requirements on how beads are oriented relative to the interrogation lasers and collection optics.
- the purpose of the fluidic sub-system is to manage all fluid and bead manipulation activities entailed in the interrogation process.
- the fluidic system must also provide a means by which it can be cleaned of all biological and chemical contamination.
- Steps 2 - 5 are performed every cycle on 8 wells at a time on an 8 ⁇ 12 well plate. Therefore a full 96 well plate requires 12 cycles to complete. Step 1 is performed on start up and whenever the fluidic system either accumulates too much air or to remove persistent beads from grooves. Likewise, step 6 is performed when an unacceptable level of fluorescent contamination has accumulated.
- FIG. 119 shows the governing design principles.
- FIG. 120 shows a diagram of the fluidic system process flow including the 6 basic steps.
- FIG. 121 shows the fluidic system including the architecture generally indicated as 1000 and major subsystems, including a transfer tube or probe assembly 1012 , a well plate 1012 , a cell or cell assembly 1008 , a puffer tube or puffer tube assembly 1006 and syringe pump 1001 , consistent with that shown in detail below in FIG. 118 .
- FIG. 118 shows in detail the basic fluidics architecture generally indicated as 1000 for performing the 6 steps of the alternative embodiment of the present invention, and includes the following elements and functionality as set forth below:
- the Syringe pump 1001 aspirates or dispenses from selected valve position.
- the Rotary valve 1002 rotates to select from 5 positions—Output to cell, Reagent 1 , Reagent 2 , Reagent 3 , Dispense Excess/Aspirate Air.
- the Tube Assembly, Output to Cell 1003 is fluoropolymer tubing to allow fluid to flow from syringe 1001 to the manifold leading to cell chimney 1007 .
- the Manifold (1 ⁇ 8) 1004 divides flow from 1 input line to 8 output lines leading to cell.
- Check valves 1005 Check valves are connected to each of the 8 lines in the manifold. The check valves prevent fluid from siphoning between lanes of the cell. Without the check valves, a small height imbalance of the fluid in one probe versus another, could cause the siphoning of fluid out of the line carrying the shorter fluid path. This could then lead to a chain reaction where all the fluid siphons out of the cell.
- Puffer tube assemblies 1006 The puffer tubes are constructed of silicone tubing with inner diameter 3/16 inch and outer diameter 5/16 inch. Compression of the tubing with the puffer block displaces fluid. The check valves prevent fluid from flowing back to the pump. Also, even without the check valves, the syringe is a stiff system which would prevent flow in this direction. Therefore all flow from compression moves out through the cell and out the probes. Release of the tubing then aspirates fluid through the probes back into the cell. The silicone tubes were selected for their elasticity and low compression set.
- the Chimney 1007 is a molded part that is critical to the transfer of beads into the cell and loading of beads into grooves.
- the chimney 1007 terminates in the cell in a narrow line shaped nozzle which we call the line port. This shape provides a relatively flat flow velocity profile across the width of the alley.
- the narrowness of the port (generally less than 2 bead lengths at the narrowest portion), prevents large slow moving eddy regions when beads turn the corner from chimney to cell.
- the spacer is aligned with the back of the nozzle to prevent significant dead zones of flow. Bead loading into grooves takes place at flow velocities that are in the laminar regime away from the immediate vicinity of the grooves.
- the chimney 1007 expands into a wider region. The height of the chimney and width of the expanded region were designed to limit the height to which beads rise in the chimney during transfer. By limiting this height, beads are not aspirated out of the chimney, which would lead to cross-contamination in later cycles.
- Top Plate 1008 a The top plate is the top optical window of the cell sandwich. It contains a row of 8 holes for attachment of the chimney to the 8 lanes of the cell. At the opposite end of the alleys, it contains a row of 8 holes for attachment of the bead ports.
- Spacer 1008 b The spacer maintains a gap between the groove plate and top window. It also seals and separates the 8 alleys from each other and from the outside world.
- the spacer is made of a silicone gasket. The gasket is attached to the two glass plates under compression and heat to create a seal.
- the spacer thickness is 0.015 inch or 380 microns. This thickness appears to be near an optimum value for balancing competing needs. On one hand, the thinner the gap the higher the velocity near the grooves, this aids in bead loading with the puffer and in bead removal. On the other hand, if the gap is too small, bubbles are not effectively cleared from the cell. Note that other materials could serve as a gasket.
- Groove Plate 1008 c the groove plate arranges the beads in an orderly fashion to be read by the reader optics.
- the groove plate is made of fused silica and is produced by an RIE (reactive ion etch) process. Fused silica is used for its low fluorescence, permitting better sensitivity to low fluorescence signals.
- RIE reactive ion etch
- Bead Entrance/Exit Ports 1009 The bead tubes from the probes terminate in this port.
- the gasket taper to a rounded cone, with the port at the apex. The goal is to minimize dead volume, so that beads maintain momentum as they enter and exit the cell through the port.
- Each alley has a fluidically isolated port.
- the bead tubes carry beads into the cell through the transfer process, and carry them out of the cell during the flush process. Fluoropolymer tubing is used for inertness, to minimize friction and reduce bubble adhesion.
- Probe Assemblies 1011 The probes are connected and integral with the bead tubes. The probes enter the well plate for transferring beads into the cell. The probes are designed to withstand “bottoming out” in the well plate and are spring loaded.
- the check valve blocks flow in the dispense direction
- Air Inlet to Valve Check Valve 1016 c This check valve allows flow in the dispense direction to waste, but blocks return flow, to prevent aspiration from waste.
- Panel Connections 1018 Field connections for the customer. Luer locks are preferred.
- Level Switches 1020 Sense reagent bottles empty below a set point or waste bottle full over a maximum level.
- Waste/Wash Tray 1022 Divided into two sections—one for dumping waste fluid and beads, and a section for washing the probe tips. Spillage from the wash overflows into waste. Fluid may be pumped using the auxiliary pump into the wash section to augment cleaning and to add bleach.
- a rotary valve selects among reagent and waste bottles, or output to the cell.
- the syringe pump aspirates or dispenses to the selected valve.
- the user places a 96 well micro-titre plate on the platform.
- An actuator moves the platform with the plate into position.
- FIG. 119 sets forth the the governing design principles.
- FIGS. 122 a - e show the basic sequence of the prime cell step.
- the purpose of the Prime Cell step is to configure the cell and its associated fluidic components in a state that allows effective transfer of beads from the well plate 1012 to the cell.
- a state is characterized by having the entire fluidic system, from the syringe pump to the probe tips filled with a buffer solution and having substantially all the air removed from the fluidic system, including both small air bubbles and larger cavities.
- the fluidic system is considered “stiff” from a fluidic point of view, and is capable of supporting bead transfer, bead loading and bead flushing operations.
- Ethanol is the first fluid pushed through the system after purging with air. Ethanol has a very low surface tension and is a good wetting agent; properties that make it ideal for removing bubbles throughout the system, especially in the cell where bubbles trapped in the small cross-section device are most difficult to remove. Once the interior surfaces of the fluidic system are wetted with ethanol and the air bubbles are removed, water is pushed through.
- the water displaces the ethanol, its high surface tension allows it to form a meniscus at the top of the chimney, which follows the shape of the chimney as it travel from the inlet at the top of the chimney to the cell at the bottom.
- a critical diameter approximately 9 mm for a round geometry and less for shapes that deviate from round
- FIGS. 123 a - e show the basic sequence of the step for transferring of beads 8 to the cell or well-plate 1008 .
- the transfer process refers to the movement of beads from the well-plate 1012 to the cell 1008 through a path, which includes the transfer tube, the cell and finally the chimney.
- beads begin their journey at the bottom of a round bottom well; since they are denser than the buffer fluid they sink to the bottom of the well.
- the method of transferring beads from the well plate involves vacuuming them off the bottom of the well with an open-ended tube attached to the cell, called a transfer tube.
- the probe tip At the distal end of the transfer tube is the probe tip which has attached to it a cone-shaped vestige designed to enhance the flow rate around beads that are more than a few tube diameters away from the center of the tube, thereby enhancing the efficiency of the transfer process.
- the method employed here involves alternating the direction of the flow and varying the rate of flow.
- a device which consists of a flexible silicone tube approximately 2′′ long by 1 ⁇ 4′′ diameter.
- the tube is connected in-line between the syringe pump and the cell and is placed between two metal surfaces, on of which moves in order to squeezed the tube. Fluid rushes out of the tube when it's squeezed and back in when it's released. Since one end of the tube is dead-ended at the syringe and the other end (the part that goes into the well with the beads) is open, the net flow is always through the open end, both inward and outward.
- Beads are transported from the well-plate to the cell by repeating a cycle of slow contractions and fast expansions of the puffer tube.
- Slow contractions re-set the puffer tube to a state whereby a vacuum can be applied to the transfer tube (expansion), thereby pulling beads toward the cell.
- the flow rate is slow liquid moves past the beads without carrying them very far in the direction of the flow.
- the flow is rapid, beads are effectively moved in the direction of the flow. Therefore, repeating the cycle causes the beads to acquire a net motion in the direction of the fast flow.
- This method is employed to lift beads out of the well plate and transport them to the cell during the transfer process and move beads out on the groove plate during the load process and remove beads from the grooves and flush them out of the cell during the flush process.
- the chimney is made to have a rapidly increasing inner diameter starting from the point at which it is attached to the cell.
- the purpose of the large inner diameter is to decrease the flow rate to the extent that beads cannot travel past the chimney and become lost in tubing.
- the inner volume of the chimney is designed to be 2 to 5 times larger than the volume of fluid displaced by the puffer during the transfer process. It was found that beads entering the chimney at high rates of speed travel about 3 ⁇ 4 the height of the chimney before the flow is reversed (slow contraction) which then pushes the beads to the bottom of the chimney and even out onto the groove plate.
- the puffer stops and beads fall under their own weight to the bottom of the chimney and pile up in small rectangular opening called the line port.
- the distribution of beads in the port is uniform across the opening, which is important for the next step; bead load.
- Beads are considered transferred after a set number of (empirically determined) puffer cycles. Once the beads are transferred excess cycles cause them to harmlessly rise and fall in the chimney. Therefore, without a means of feedback, the transfer process is always run with an excess number of cycles to ensure that a high percentage of beads are transferred. Efficiencies that range between 95 and 99.9% are obtained after about 15 cycles, approximately 40 seconds. The proc0ess concludes with beads settling to the bottom of the chimney on the groove plate in a pile substantially uniform in distribution within the port, a consequence of randomization caused by turbulent flow in the chimney.
- the port which is defined as the opening of the chimney to the cell, is rectangular in shape, approximately 6 mm long and 250 ⁇ m wide. It is surrounded on three edges by the gasket, which forms the perimeter of each of the 8 independent lanes. The fourth edge is open to the lane leading to the grooved region. The back edge of the port is aligned as closely as possible to the edge of the gasket so as to minimize dead zones in the flow field caused by eddy currents. Gaps that range from 0 to 50 ⁇ m were found to eliminate such dead regions behind the opening of the port where beads could potentially become stuck.
- the width of the port opening is large enough to ensure beads don't form a log jam but small enough ensure the velocity of the flow through any portion of the opening is sufficiently large to carry beads out of the port region during the bead load process.
- the range of openings found to be effective were 200 to 400 ⁇ m.
- the gasket not only defines the perimeter of the lane around the grooved region and the ports, it also defines the height of the column of fluid in the cell.
- the gasket With a density of 2.2 glass beads sink in aqueous solutions, which means when they are in the cell they will lay on the surface of the groove plate (the bottom of the cell), where the velocity of the laminar flow is close to zero.
- the height of the laminar flow field thickness of the gasket
- the gasket thickness should be kept as thin as possible.
- the first pertains to the persistence of small air bubbles. The smaller the gap between the groove plate and the top plate the harder it becomes to flush small air bubbles away. It was found that a gasket thickness of less than 300 ⁇ m resulted in such problems.
- the second relates to the pressure drop across the cell during the transfer cycle. Because the entire pressure generated by the puffer during transfer drops across both the cell and the transfer tube, since they're in series with each other, the impedance of the cell cannot be much larger than the transfer line. Otherwise the flow rate at the distal end of the transfer tube will be insufficient to cause bead transport out of the well. Therefore it is important to balance the impedance of the transfer tube with the cell. Again, the minimum gasket thickness was found to be around 300 ⁇ m.
- FIGS. 124 a - b show the basic sequence of the step for loading of the beads 8 into the grooves of the well-plate 1008 .
- the step for scanning the beads in the well-plate 1008 is consistent with that described above.
- FIGS. 125 a - b show the basic sequence of the step for flushing the beads 8 from the grooves of the well-plate 1008 .
- FIG. 126 The Groove Plate Design
- FIGS. 126 a and b show the groove plate design.
- FIGS. 127 a - d Bead Alignment Feasibility
- FIGS. 127 a - d relate to bead feasibility experiments, including FIG. 127 a that shows bead alignment feasibility experiments with performance requirements and drivers and the basic parameters of the experiment; FIG. 127 b that shows multiplex ranges; FIG. 127 c that shows bead loss feasibility experiments; and FIG. 127 d that shows bead flush feasibility experiments.
- FIGS. 128-133 show more detailed diagrams of components of the basic architecture 1001 .
- microbead is used herein as a label and does not restrict any embodiment or application of the present invention to certain dimensions, materials and/or geometries.
- any of the embodiments described herein are merely for illustrative purposes and, as such, any other dimensions and/or geometries may be used if desired, depending on the application, size, performance, manufacturing requirements, or other factors, in view of the teachings herein.
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Clinical Laboratory Science (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- Fluid Mechanics (AREA)
- Dispersion Chemistry (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Investigating, Analyzing Materials By Fluorescence Or Luminescence (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- The present application claims the benefit of: U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/609,583, filed Sep. 13, 2004, entitled “Improved Method and Apparatus for Aligning Microbeads in Order to Interrogate Same” (Docket No. CV-0082 PR); Ser. No. 60/610,910, filed Sep. 17, 2004, entitled “Method and Apparatus for Aligning Microbeads in Order to Interrogate Same” (Docket No. CV-0086 PR); and Ser. No. 60/610,833, filed Sep. 17, 2004, entitled “Method and Apparatus for Transporting and Kitting Microbeads” (Docket No. CV-0087 PR); and is a continuation-in-part of: U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/661,836, filed Sep. 12, 2003, entitled “Method And Apparatus For Aligning Microbeads In Order To Interrogate The Same” (Docket No. CV-0042), and Ser. No. 11/063,665, filed Feb. 22, 2005, entitled “Multi-well Plate with Alignment Grooves for Encoded Microparticles” (Docket No. CV-0053 US), all the above of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
- The following cases contain subject matter related to that disclosed herein and are all incorporated herein by reference in their entirety: U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/661,234, filed Sep. 12, 2003, entitled “Diffraction Grating-Based Optical Identification Element”, (Docket No. CV-0038A); Ser. No. 10/661,031, filed Sep. 12, 2003, entitled “Diffraction Grating-Based Encoded Micro-particles for Multiplexed Experiments”, (Docket No. CV-0039A); Ser. No. 10/661,082, filed Sep. 12, 2003, entitled “Method and Apparatus for Labeling Using Diffraction Grating based Encoded Optical Identification Elements” (Docket No. CV-0040); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/661,115, filed Sep. 12, 2003, entitled “Assay Stick” (Docket No. CV-0041); Ser. No. 10/661,254 filed Sep. 12, 2003, entitled “Chemical Synthesis Using Diffraction Grating-Based Encoded Optical Elements” (Docket No. CV-0043); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/661,116, filed Sep. 12, 2003, entitled “Method Of Manufacturing Of A Diffraction Grating-Based Identification Element” (Docket No. CV-0044); and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/763,995, filed Jan. 22, 2004, entitled, “Hybrid Random Bead/Chip Based Microarray” (Docket No. CV-0054); and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/956,791, filed Oct. 1, 2004, entitled “Optical Reader for Diffraction Grating-Based Encoded Optical Identification Elements” (Docket No. CV-0092 US).
- 1. Technical Field
- The present invention generally relates to a method and apparatus for processing information contained on microbeads, each microbead having an elongated body with a code embedded therein along a longitudinal axis thereof to be read by a code reading device; and more particularly to a method and apparatus for aligning the microbeads so the longitudinal axis thereof is in a fixed orientation relative to the code reading or other device.
- This invention also relates to transporting beads, and more particularly to transporting microbeads from one location to another.
- 2. Description of Related Art
- Many industries have a need for uniquely identifiable objects or for the ability to uniquely identify objects, for sorting, tracking, and/or identification/tagging. Existing technologies, such as bar codes, electronic microchips/transponders, radio-frequency identification (RFID), and fluorescence and other optical techniques, are often inadequate. For example, existing technologies may be too large for certain applications, may not provide enough different codes, or cannot withstand harsh temperature, chemical, nuclear and/or electromagnetic environments.
- Therefore, it would be desirable to obtain a coding element or platform that provides the capability of providing many codes (e.g., greater than 1 million codes), that can be made very small and/or that can withstand harsh environments.
- Moreover, it would be desirable to provide a method and apparatus to position and align such encoded elements so as to identify the code to determine information about the process or application to which it is related and/or to better sense the chemical content on the elements and correlate it in relation to such process or application.
- It is also well known that microbeads or microparticles may be used for various types of multiplexed chemical experiments or assays or for identifying, authenticating or sorting items. One challenge in transporting microbeads is being able to move them reliably from one location to another reliably and/or being able to move a predetermined number of beads.
- Accordingly, it would be desirable to provide a reliable technique for transporting microbeads from one location to another.
- In its broadest sense, the present invention provides a new and unique method and apparatus for aligning new and unique coding elements or microbeads, wherein each microbead has an elongated body with a code embedded therein along a longitudinal axis thereof to be read by a code reading or other detection device. The method features the step of aligning the microbeads with a positioning device so the longitudinal axis of the microbeads is positioned in a fixed orientation relative to the code reading or other detection device.
- The new and unique microbeads are not spherical, but instead have an elongated shape and may be cylindrical, cubic, rectangular, or any other elongated shape. The microbeads are typically composed of silica glass with some germanium and/or boron doped region or regions that are photosensitive to ultraviolet light. Coded microbeads are individually identifiable via a single or series of spatially overlapping pitches written into them. The microbeads may be used in many different processes. After such processing, the microbeads have a resulting chemical content on the surface of each bead that is sensed and correlated in relation to the code contained with the microbead to determine information about the process.
- When used in an assay process, the microbeads are typically cylindrically (i.e. tubular) shaped glass beads and between 25 and 250 μm in diameter and between 100 and 500 μm long. Other sizes may be used if desired. They have a holographic code embedded in the central region of the bead, which is used to identify it from the rest of the beads in a batch of beads with many different DNA or other chemical probes. A cross reference is used to determine which probe is attached to which bead, thus allowing the researcher to correlate the chemical content on each bead with the measured fluorescence signal. Because the code consists of a diffraction grating 12 typically disposed along an axis of the microbead, there is a particular alignment required between the incident readout laser beam and the readout detector in two of the three rotational axes. In aeronautical terms, the two of the three rotational axes include the pitch of the microbead in the front-to-back direction and the yaw of the microbead in a side-to-side direction. The third axis, rotation about the center axis of the cylinder, is azimuthally symmetric and therefore does not require alignment. The third axis is analogous to the roll axis.
- The invention provides a method for aligning the microbeads in the two rotational axes to a fixed orientation relative to an incident laser beam and a readout camera, otherwise known as the code camera. The invention further provides a method for rapidly aligning a large number of microbeads, between 1,000 and 1,000,000 microbeads or more, economically, and with the necessary tolerances. The method is flexible as it relates to the size of the microbeads and can be integrated into a fully automated system, which prepares the microbeads for rapid readout by an automated code-reading machine.
- In one embodiment of the present invention, the positioning device includes a plate with a series of parallel grooves (or channels), which could have one of several different shapes, including square, rectangular, v-shaped, semi-circular, etc., as well as a flat bottom groove with tapered walls. The grooves are formed into an optically transparent medium such as boro-silicate glass, fused silica, or other glasses, or plastic or other transparent support materials. The depth of the grooves will depend on the diameter of the microbead but generally they will be between 10 and 125 μm, but may be larger as discussed hereinafter, depending on the application. The spacing of the grooves is most optimal when it is between 1 and 2 times the diameter of the microbead, providing for both maximum packing density as well as maximum probability that a microbead will fall into a groove. The width of grooves is most optimal when the gap between the microbead and the walls of the grooves is sufficiently small to prevent the microbeads from rotating within the grooves by more than a few degrees. The bottom of the groove must also be maintained flat enough to prevent the microbeads from rotating, by more than a few tenths of a degree, relative to the incident laser beam. Another critical aspect of the grooved plate is the optical quality of the grooves. To prevent excess scatter of the readout laser beam, which could lead to low contrast between the code signal and the background scatter, it is important that the grooves exhibit high optical quality. The beads can be read in the groove plate from below, on top of, or the side of the plate, depending on the application and type of microbead used.
- Some advantages of the groove plate approach include:
- Rapid simultaneous alignment of microbeads. Alignment rates ˜1000's per second.
- Once the microbeads are aligned, they can be read as many times as necessary to get a good reading or improve statistics.
- Microbeads naturally fall into groove (presumably by capillary forces) at very high packing densities.
- Microbeads can be mixed after reading then re-read to enhance the statistics of readout process.
- In an alternative embodiment of the present invention, the positioning device may includes a tube having a bore for receiving, aligning and reading the microbeads.
- Moreover, the present invention also provides an apparatus for aligning an optical identification element. The optical identification element having an optical substrate having at least a portion thereof with at least one diffraction grating disposed therein, the grating having at least one refractive index pitch superimposed at a common location, the grating providing an output optical signal when illuminated by an incident light signal, the optical output signal being indicative of a code, and the optical identification element being an elongated object with a longitudinal axis. The apparatus also having an alignment device which aligns the optical identification element such that said output optical signal is indicative of the code.
- The present invention also provides an optical element capable of having many optically readable codes. The element has a substrate containing an optically readable composite diffraction grating having one or more collocated index spacing or pitches Λ. The invention allows for a high number of uniquely identifiable codes (e.g., millions, billions, or more). The codes may be digital binary codes and thus are digitally readable or may be other numerical bases if desired.
- Also, the elements may be very small “microbeads” (or microelements or microparticles or encoded particles) for small applications (about 1-1000 microns), or larger “macroelements” for larger applications (e.g., 1-1000 mm or much larger). The elements may also be referred to as encoded particles or encoded threads. Also, the element may be embedded within or part of a larger substrate or object.
- The code in the element is interrogated using free-space optics and can be made alignment insensitive.
- The gratings (or codes) are embedded inside (including on or near the surface) of the substrate and may be permanent non-removable codes that can operate in harsh environments (chemical, temperature, nuclear, electromagnetic, etc.).
- The code is not affected by spot imperfections, scratches, cracks or breaks in the substrate. In addition, the codes are spatially invariant. Thus, splitting or slicing an element axially produces more elements with the same code. Accordingly, when a bead is axially split-up, the code is not lost, but instead replicated in each piece.
- The invention is a significant improvement over prior art bead movement techniques in being able to repeatably move a predetermined number of beads from one location (or container or well) to another location (or container or well). Also, the invention provides for the reliable and repeatable transportation of all beads from one container or well to another or from one well to multiple wells using a “telegraph” technique. The invention is useful for creating multiplexed bead kits having a required number of beads of each code in a kit. The present invention may also be used to move the beads from a container to a reader to allow for the bead codes and/or chemistry on the beads to be read. The invention may be used in any assay or multiplexed experiment, combinatorial chemistry or biochemistry assay process, or in a taggant application, or any other application where beads are in a liquid solution and need to be transported, kitted and/or read.
- Advantages of the “telegraph” technique of the present invention are that it is low cost, fast, effective/reliable for moving beads, and low precision is required. Advantages of the pipetting techniques of the present invention is that the pippeter is a standard off the shelf product, it is flexible to be used with any type of well or container (e.g., sizes, shapes and other characteristics), or other fluid configurations, and does not require any sealing or physical connections to the wells.
- The foregoing and other objects, features and advantages of the present invention will become more apparent in light of the following detailed description of exemplary embodiments thereof.
- The drawing is not drawn to scale and includes the following Figures:
-
FIG. 1 shows the steps of a microbead platform assay process. -
FIG. 2 is a side view of an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 3 is a top level optical schematic for reading a code in an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a grooved plate for use with an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 5 is a diagram of the flat grooves and an example of the dimensionality thereof in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a plate with holes for use with an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a grooved plate for use with an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 8 is a diagram of a microbead mapper reading, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 8 a is a diagram of a system for both detecting a material on and reading a code in a microbead, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 9 is a diagram of a plate having microbeads thereon in relation to an open plate format for detection and reading of the microbead in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 10 is a diagram of a starting point for handling microbeads for readout in a cuvette process in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 11 is a diagram of a second step in the readout process in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 12 is a diagram of the readout step in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 13 is a diagram of final steps in the cuvette process in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 14 is a diagram of an example of the cuvette showing its mount on a kinematic plate in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 15 is a diagram of an alternative embodiment of a cuvette showing a port for fluid filling/emptying using a pipette in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 16 is a diagram of an alternative embodiment of a cuvette showing an alternative port for fluid filling/emptying using a pipette in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 17 is a diagram of a two zone cuvette showing a free region and a trapped region in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 18 (a) is a diagram of steps for a conventional flow cytometer reader in a single pass cytometer process in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 18 (b) is a diagram of steps for a disk cytometer reader in a multipass cytometer process in accordance with the invention. - FIGS. 19(a), (b) and (c) show embodiments of a disk cytometer in accordance with the invention.
-
FIG. 20 (a) show an embodiment of a disk cytometer having radial channels for spin drying in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 20 (b) show an alternative embodiment of a disk cytometer having a mechanical iris for providing a variable aperture for bead access to grooves in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 21 show an embodiment of a SU8 groove plate having 450 in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 21 show an embodiment of a SU8 cylindrical grooved plate having 450×65 microns beads in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 22 show an embodiment of an alignment tube in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 23 show an alternative embodiment of an alignment tube having a receiving flange in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 24 is an optical schematic for reading a code in an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 25 (a) is an image of a code on a CCD camera from an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 25 (b) is a graph showing an digital representation of bits in a code in an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 26 illustrations (a)-(c) show images of digital codes on a CCD camera, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 27 illustrations (a)-(d) show graphs of different refractive index pitches and a summation graph, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 28 is an alternative optical schematic for reading a code in an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 29 illustrations (a)-(b) are graphs of reflection and transmission wavelength spectrum for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIGS. 30-31 are side views of a thin grating for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 32 is a perspective view showing azimuthal multiplexing of a thin grating for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 33 is side view of a blazed grating for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 34 is a graph of a plurality of states for each bit in a code for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 35 is a side view of an optical identification element where light is incident on an end face, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIGS. 36-37 are side views of an optical identification element where light is incident on an end face, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 38 , illustrations (a)-(c), are side views of an optical identification element having a blazed grating, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 39 is a side view of an optical identification element having a coating, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 40 is a side view of whole and partitioned optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 41 is a side view of an optical identification element having a grating across an entire dimension, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 42 , illustrations (a)-(c), are perspective views of alternative embodiments for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 43 , illustrations (a)-(b), are perspective views of an optical identification element having multiple grating locations, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 44 , is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment for an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 45 is a view an optical identification element having a plurality of gratings located rotationally around the optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 46 , illustrations (a)-(e), show various geometries of an optical identification element that may have holes therein, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 47 , illustrations (a)-(c), show various geometries of an optical identification element that may have teeth thereon, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 48 , illustrations (a)-(c), show various geometries of an optical identification element, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 49 is a side view an optical identification element having a reflective coating thereon, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIG. 50 , illustrations (a)-(b), are side views of an optical identification element polarized along an electric or magnetic field, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIGS. 51 and 52 are diagrams of bead reads from flat retro-reflector trays, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIGS. 53 and 54 are diagrams of beads read thru V-grooves, in accordance with the present invention. -
FIGS. 55-83 are various alternative embodiments of the present invention. -
FIG. 1 shows, by way of example, steps of a microbead assay process which uses the microbead technology of the present invention. The steps of the assay process shown inFIG. 1 include a first step in which the microbeads are used in a solution; a second step in which the microbeads are aligned in a desired manner; a third step in which the code and florescence in and/or on the microbeads are read-out; and a fourth step in which the information related to the code and florescence is processed in relation to data management and bioinformatics. The present invention primarily relates to step 2 wherein the microbeads are uniquely aligned so the longitudinal axis of the microbeads is positioned in a fixed orientation relative to the code and florescence reading device, as well as relating to a lesser extent to step 3. It is important to note that the scope of the present invention is not intended to be limited to any particular type or kind of assay process or other process in which the microbead technology is used. The scope of the invention is intended to include embodiments in which the microbead technology of the present invention is used in many different processes. - Other processes/applications where the present invention may be used include use of the beads in taggant applications, where the encoded beads are used to identify, track, and/or authenticate, items such as is discussed in aforementioned copending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/661,082, filed Sep. 12, 2003, entitled “Method and Apparatus for Labeling Using Diffraction Grating-Based Encoded Optical Identification Elements”, (CyVera Docket No. CV-0040).
-
FIG. 2 shows a diffraction grating-based optical identification element 8 (or encoded element or coded element) that comprises a knownoptical substrate 10, having anoptical diffraction grating 12 disposed (or written, impressed, embedded, imprinted, etched, grown, deposited or otherwise formed) in the volume of or on a surface of thesubstrate 10 along the length or longitudinal axis L of theelement 8, which is otherwise known hereinafter as the microbead. The grating 12 is a periodic or aperiodic variation in the effective refractive index and/or effective optical absorption of at least a portion of thesubstrate 10. - The
optical identification element 8 described herein is same as that described in Copending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/661,234, filed Sep. 12, 2003, entitled “Diffraction Grating-Based Optical Identification Element”, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. - In particular, the
substrate 10 has aninner region 20 where the grating 12 is located. Theinner region 20 may be photosensitive to allow the writing or impressing of the grating 12. Thesubstrate 10 has anouter region 18, which does not have the grating 12 therein. - The grating 12 is a combination of one or more individual spatial periodic sinusoidal variations (or components) in the refractive index that are collocated at substantially the same location on the
substrate 10 along the length of thegrating region 20, each having a spatial period (or pitch) Λ. The resultant combination of these individual pitches is the grating 12, comprising spatial periods (Λ1-Λn) each representing a bit in the code. Thus, the grating 12 represents a unique optically readable code, made up of bits, where a bit corresponds to a unique pitch Λ within thegrating 12. Accordingly, for a digital binary (0-1) code, the code is determined by which spatial periods (Λ1-Λn) exist (or do not exist) in a givencomposite grating 12. The code or bits may also be determined by additional parameters (or additional degrees of multiplexing), and other numerical bases for the code may be used, as discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application. - The grating 12 may also be referred to herein as a composite or collocated grating. Also, the grating 12 may be referred to as a “hologram”, as the grating 12 transforms, translates, or filters an input optical signal to a predetermined desired optical output pattern or signal.
- The
substrate 10 has an outer diameter D1 and comprises silica glass (SiO2) having the appropriate chemical composition to allow the grating 12 to be disposed therein or thereon. Other materials for theoptical substrate 10 may be used if desired. For example, thesubstrate 10 may be made of any glass, e.g., silica, phosphate glass, borosilicate glass, or other glasses, or made of glass and plastic, or solely plastic. For high temperature or harsh chemical applications, theoptical substrate 10 made of a glass material is desirable. If a flexible substrate is needed, plastic, rubber or polymer-based substrate may be used. Theoptical substrate 10 may be any material capable of having the grating 12 disposed in thegrating region 20 and that allows light to pass through it to allow the code to be optically read. - The
optical substrate 10 with the grating 12 has a length L and an outer diameter D1, and theinner region 20 diameter D. The length L can range from very small “microbeads” (or microelements, micro-particles, or encoded particles), about 1-1000 microns or smaller, to larger “macro beads” or “macroelements” for larger applications (about 1.0-1000 mm or greater). In addition, the outer dimension D1 can range from small (less than 1000 microns) to large (1.0-1000 mm and greater). Other dimensions and lengths for thesubstrate 10 and the grating 12 may be used. - The grating 12 may have a length Lg of about the length L of the
substrate 10. Alternatively, the length Lg of the grating 12 may be shorter than the total length L of thesubstrate 10. - The
outer region 18 is made of pure silica (SiO2) and has a refractive index n2 of about 1.458 (at a wavelength of about 1553 nm), and the innergrating region 20 of thesubstrate 10 has dopants, such as germanium and/or boron, to provide a refractive index n1 of about 1.453, which is less than that ofouter region 18 by about 0.005. Other indices of refraction n1,n2 for thegrating region 20 and theouter region 18, respectively, may be used, if desired, provided the grating 12 can be impressed in the desiredgrating region 20. For example, thegrating region 20 may have an index of refraction that is larger than that of theouter region 18 orgrating region 20 may have the same index of refraction as theouter region 18 if desired. -
FIG. 3 shows a configuration for reading or detecting the code in themicrobead 8 using a code reader orother detector device 29, which is used instep 3 of the process shown inFIG. 1 . In operation, anincident light 24 of a wavelength λ, e.g., 532 nm from a known frequency doubled Nd:YAG laser or 632 nm from a known Helium-Neon laser, is incident on the grating 12 in thesubstrate 10. Any other input wavelength λ can be used if desired provided λ is within the optical transmission range of the substrate (discussed more herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application). A portion of the input light 24 passes straight through the grating 12, as indicated by aline 25. The remainder of theinput light 24 is reflected by the grating 12, as indicated by aline 27 and provided to adetector 29. Theoutput light 27 may be a plurality of beams, each having the same wavelength λ as the input wavelength λ and each having a different output angle indicative of the pitches (Λ1-Λn) existing in thegrating 12. Alternatively, theinput light 24 may be a plurality of wavelengths and theoutput light 27 may have a plurality of wavelengths indicative of the pitches (Λ1-Λn) existing in thegrating 12. Alternatively, the output light may be a combination of wavelengths and output angles. The above techniques are discussed in more detail herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application. - The code reader or
detector 29 has the necessary optics, electronics, software and/or firmware to perform the functions described herein. In particular, the detector reads theoptical signal 27 diffracted or reflected from the grating 12 and determines the code based on the pitches present or the optical pattern, as discussed more herein or in the aforementioned patent application. An output signal indicative of the code is provided on aline 31. - The dimensions, geometries, materials, and material properties of the
substrate 10 are selected such that the desired optical and material properties are met for a given application. The resolution and range for the optical codes are scalable by controlling these parameters as discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application. Also, thebeads 8 may be made of any of the materials, geometries, and coatings described in copending U.S. patent application Ser. No. (Docket No. CV-0038A). - We have used the present invention with cylindrical beads having size of about 65 micron diameter and 400 microns long and about 28 microns diameter and about 250 microns long. However, other bead sizes may be used.
-
FIG. 4 shows one embodiment of apositioning device 200 for aligning themicrobeads 8 so the longitudinal axis of the microbeads is in a fixed orientation relative to the code reading or other detection device. Thepositioning device 200 is shown in the form of a tray orplate 200 having v-grooves 205 for align themicrobeads 8 and is used instep 2 of the process shown inFIG. 1 . - As shown, the
microbead elements 8 are placed in thetray 200 with v-grooves 205 to allow theelements 8 to be aligned in a predetermined direction for illumination and reading/detection as discussed herein. Alternatively, thegrooves 205 may haveholes 210 that provide suction to keep theelements 8 in position. - The grooves in the groove plate may be made in many different ways, including being formed by SU8 photoresistant material, mechanically machining; deep reactive ion etching; or injection molding. One advantage of the injection molding approach is that the plate can be manufactured in volume at relatively low cost, and disposed of after the information about the beads is gathered in the assay process. The groove plate may be made of glass, including fused silica, low fluorescence glass, boro silicate glass, or other transparent glasses or plastic. Silicon is used because it is reflective so a reflective coating is typically not needed. Alternative, a mirror coating can be applied to the plate material to achieve the desired reflectivity.
- The scope of the invention is not intended to be limited to any particular groove shape. For example,
FIG. 5 shows a diagram aplate 300 having flat grooves 302 instead of V-grooves as shown inFIG. 3 . Some characteristics of the groove according to the present invention are as follows: - The groove width (w) should be at least as wide as the diameter of the bead (D) but not larger than D+15 μm.
- The thickness of the depth of the groove (T) should be at least 0.5 times the diameter of the bead so that it sufficiently traps a bead once it falls into the groove even when it is subjected to mechanical agitation. The depth should not exceed 1.5 times the diameter of the bead so as to prevent more than one bead from falling into the same groove location.
- Groove plates have been made using a thick photoresist called SU8 and is available from Microchem. The resist is both chemically inert and mechanically robust once fully cured. The groove walls are formed by the resist material, which is deposited onto a glass or substrate. Advantages of this process include the ability to tailor the depth of groove by controlling the thickness of the resist material, and virtually every other geometric attribute through the design of the photo mask. Because it is photolithographic process, essentially any shape profile can be made. For example grooves can be made in simple rows, concentric circles, or spirals. Other features such as discrete wells, spots and cross hatches can be made as fiducial marks for tracking and positional registration purposes.
- The scope of the invention is also intended to include the grooves having a flat bottom as shown in
FIG. 5 with outwardly tapered walls. -
FIG. 6 shows an alternative embodiment, wherein alignment may be achieved by using aplate 674 havingholes 676 slightly larger than theelements 8 if the light 24 (FIGS. 2 and 4 ) is incident along thegrating axis 207. The incident light indicated as 670 is reflected off the grating and exits through the end as a light 672 and the remaining light passes through the grating and theplate 674 as aline 678. Alternatively, if a blazed grating is used,incident light 670 may be reflected out the side of the plate (or any other desired angle), as indicated by aline 680. Alternatively, input light may be incident from the side of theplate 674 and reflected out the top of theplate 674 as indicated by aline 684. The light 670 may be a plurality of separate light beams or asingle light beam 686 that illuminates theentire tray 674 if desired. -
FIG. 7 shows an alternative embodiment, wherein the v-groove plate discussed hereinbefore withFIG. 4 may be used for the end illumination/readout condition. In this case, the grating 12 may have a blaze angle such that light incident along the axial grating axis will be reflected upward, downward, or at a predetermined angle for code detection. Similarly, the input light may be incident on the grating in a downward, upward, or at a predetermined angle and the grating 12 may reflect light along the axial grating axis for code detection. -
FIG. 8 showsmicrobeads 8 arranged on aplate 200 havinggrooves 205. As shown, themicrobeads 8 have different codes (e.g. “41101”, “20502”, “41125”) using 16-bit, binary symbology), which may be read or detected using the reader or detector configuration described in relation toFIG. 3 . The codes in the beads are used to provide a cross reference to determine which probe is attached to which bead, thus allowing the researcher to correlate the chemical content on each bead with the measured fluorescence signal inStep 3 of the process shown inFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 8 a shows a code reader and detector for obtaining information from themicrobead 8 inFIG. 8 . The codes in themicrobeads 8 are detected when illuminated by incident light 24 which produces a diffracted or outputlight signal 27 to areader 820, which includes the optics and electronics necessary to read the codes in eachbead 8, as described herein and/or in the aforementioned copending patent application. Thereader 820 provides a signal on aline 822 indicative of the code in each of thebead 8. Theincident light 24 may be directed transversely from the side of the grooved plate 200 (or from an end or any other angle) with a narrow band (single wavelength) and/or multiple wavelength source, in which case the code is represented by a spatial distribution of light and/or a wavelength spectrum, respectively, as described hereinafter and in the aforementioned copending patent application. Other illumination, readout techniques, types of gratings, geometries, materials, etc. may be used for themicrobeads 8, as discussed hereinafter and in the aforementioned patent application. - For assays that use fluorescent molecule markers to label or tag chemicals, an
optical excitation signal 800 is incident on themicrobeads 8 on thegrooved plate 200 and a fluorescentoptical output signal 802 emanates from thebeads 8 that have the fluorescent molecule attached. The fluorescentoptical output signal 802 passes through alens 804, which provides focused light 802 to a knownoptical fluorescence detector 808. Instead of or in addition to thelens 802, other imaging optics may be used to provide the desired characteristics of the optical image/signal onto thefluorescence detector 808. Thedetector 808 provides an output signal on aline 810 indicative of the amount of fluorescence on a givenbead 8, which can then be interpreted to determine what type of chemical is attached to thebead 10. - Consistent with that discussed herein, the
grooved plate 200 may be made of glass or plastic or any material that is transparent to the codereading incident beam 24 and code reading output light beams 27 as well as thefluorescent excitation beam 800 and the output fluorescentoptical signal 802, and is properly suited for the desired application or experiment, e.g., temperature range, harsh chemicals, or other application specific requirements. - The
code signal 822 from thebead code reader 820 and thefluorescent signal 810 from the fluorescence detector are provided to a knowncomputer 812. Thecomputer 812 reads the code associated with each bead and determines the chemical probe that was attached thereto from a predetermined table that correlates a predetermined relationship between the bead code and the attached probed. In addition, thecomputer 812 and reads the fluorescence associated with each bead and determines the sample or analyte that is attached to the bead from a predetermined table that correlates a predetermined relationship between the fluorescence tag and the analyte attached thereto. Thecomputer 812 then determines information about the analyte and/or the probe as well as about the bonding of the analyte to the probe, and provides such information on a display, printout, storage medium or other interface to an operator, scientist or database for review and/or analysis, consistent with shown instep 4 ofFIG. 1 . Thesources code reader 820, thefluorescence optics 804 anddetector 808 and thecomputer 812 may all be part of anassay stick reader 824. - Alternatively, instead of having the
code excitation source 801 and thefluorescence excitation source 803, thereader 24 may have only one source beam which provides both the reflectedoptical signal 27 for determining the code and thefluorescence signal 802 for reading the tagged analyte attached to thebeads 8. In that case the input optical signal is a common wavelength that performs both functions simultaneously, or sequentially, if desired. - The
microbeads 8 may be coated with the desired probe compound, chemical, or molecule prior to being placed in thegrooved plate 200. Alternatively, thebeads 8 may be coated with the probe after being placed in thegrooved plate 200. As discussed hereinbefore, the probe material may be an Oligo, cDNA, polymer, or any other desired probe compound, chemical, cell, or molecule for performing an assay. - The scope of the invention is not intended to be limited to using or detecting fluorescent molecule markers during the assay process. For example, embodiments of the invention are envisioned using and detection other types of molecular markers in other types of processes.
- There are at least two possible modes or approaches of use for the groove plate.
-
FIG. 9 shows the first, or open plate format, meaning there is no top to cover themicrobeads 8 and the v-grooves 205. In this mode, themicrobeads 8 are dispensed onto theplate 200 using, for example, a pipette tip or syringe tip, although the scope of the invention is not intended to be limited to the manner of depositing the microbeads on the plate. Themicrobeads 8 may be then agitated by a sonic transducer (not shown), or manipulated with a mechanical wiper (not shown) or some form of spray nozzle (not shown) to encourage all themicrobeads 8 to line up in thegrooves 205. It has been observed that substantially all the microbeads naturally line up in thegrooves 205 without the need for encouragement. However, there are always some microbeads, such asmicrobead plate 200 or forced to fall into agroove 205. The open format approach has the advantages that grooves plate consists just of the plate and no other complicated features such as walls and a top, and possibly other chambers or channels to allow fluid flow and bubble removal. It also has the advantage that it can easily be made with a standard microscope slide, which is designed to fit conventional micro array readers or microscopes. However, the open format approach would most likely require the microbeads to be dried out prior to reading, to prevent non-uniform and unpredictable optical aberrations caused by the uneven evaporation of the buffer solution. -
FIGS. 10-17 show the second mode which is called a closed format, that consists of not only of a groove plate but also a top and at least three walls to hold the solution and the microbeads in a cuvette-like device (or cell or chamber) generally indicated as 500 shown, for example, inFIG. 10 . - In summary, the closed format approach provides a method for effectively distributing and aligning microbeads during the readout process, as described below:
- The basic process for handling microbeads with a curvette for readout consists of the following steps:
- (1)
FIG. 10 shows a starting point for handling microbeads for a readout. The microbeads start in a test tube. Typical test-tube volumes are 1.5 ml. The microbeads will generally be in a liquid (usually water with a small amount of other buffer chemicals to adjust pH and possibly a small amount [˜0.01%] of detergent.) As shown, abead tube 502 contains the microbeads in a solution, which forms part ofstep 1 of the process shown inFIG. 1 . - (2)
FIG. 11 shows thebead tube 502 is coupled to aflange 504 of thecuvette 500 is inverted and the beads flow onto the groove plate. The cuvette consists of two round flanges that accept test-tubes, a transparent window, and an opposing groove plate.FIG. 14 shows a drawing of a prototype cuvette. The groove plate outer dimensions can be any size, but typical microscope slide dimensions are convenient (1″×3″). The grooves are mechanically or laser cut lengthwise, and have dimensions that are chosen for the exact size of cylindrical microbead. For instance, for a 125 μm diameter bead, grooves of approximately 150 μm wide by 150 μm deep are used. One tube carries the microbeads and a small amount of carrier fluid. The second tube may be larger and hold more fluid. The purpose of the second tube is to guarantee a certain fluid level in the next step. - (3) After the cuvette is inverted and the microbeads flow out onto the groove plate side of the cuvette, the microbeads naturally align in the grooves via a small amount of rocking or agitation, which forms part of
step 2 of the process shown inFIG. 1 . - (4)
FIG. 12 shows the readout step, in which, after the beads are all (or nearly all) aligned in the groove plate, the entire plate is moved (or the readout laser beam is scanned) in order to read the codes of each beam, which forms part ofstep 3 of the process shown inFIG. 1 . In effect, once the microbeads are in the grooves, the entire cuvette is moved back and forth across a readout beam. The readout beam is transmitted through the cuvette and contains the code bits encoded on the scattering angles. - (5)
FIG. 13 shows a final step, in which the cuvette is inverted to its original position and the beads flow back into theoriginal tube 502, which forms part ofstep 3 of the process shown inFIG. 1 . In other words, after the readout process, the cuvette is re-inverted and the microbeads flow back into the original test tube. -
FIG. 14 shows an example of a cuvette generally indicated as 700 that is mounted on akinematic base plate 710. As shown, thecuvette 700 has atube 702 for holding the solution with the beads and atop window 704 that is a 1 mm thick glass plate having dimensions of about 1″ by 3″. The cuvette also has a bottom plate that is a transparent groove plate. The location pins 712 andlever arm 714 hold thecuvette 700 in place on thekinematic plate 710. - One of the key advantages of using the cuvette device is that the potential to nearly index match the glass microbeads with a buffer solution thereby reducing the divergence of the laser beam caused by the lensing effect of the microbeads, and minimizing scatter form the groove plate itself.
- Another advantage involves the potential to prevent microbeads from ever stacking up on top of each other, by limiting the space between the bottom and the top plate to be less than twice the diameter of the microbeads.
- Another advantage is that the cover keeps the fluid from evaporating.
-
FIGS. 15-16 show alternative embodiments of the cuvette shown inFIGS. 10-14 . As shown, the microbeads are injected into the cuvette by placing them near the edge of the opening and allowing the surface tension, or an induced fluid flow, to pull the microbeads into the cuvette, where, because of the limited height between the floor and the ceiling of the cuvette, they are confined to move around in a plane, albeit with all the rotational degrees of freedom unconstrained. Once in the cuvette the microbeads are quickly and sufficiently constrained by the grooves as the microbeads fall into them. As in the case of the open format there is still the finite probability that some number of microbeads will not fall into the grooves and must be coaxed in by some form of agitation (ultrasonic, shaking, rocking, etc.). -
FIG. 17 shows an alternative embodiment of the closed approach, which involves sectioning the closed region into two regions, one where the microbeads are free to move about in a plane, either in a groove or not, and a second region where the microbeads are trapped in a groove and can only move along the axes of a groove. Trapping the microbeads in a groove is accomplished by further reducing the height of the chamber to the extent that the microbeads can no longer hop out of a groove. In this embodiment, the free region is used to pre-align the microbeads into a groove, facilitating the introduction of microbeads into the trapped section. By tilting this type of cuvette up gravity can be used to pull the microbeads along a groove from the free region to the trapped region. Once in the trapped region the microbeads move to the end of the groove where they stop. Subsequent microbeads will begin to stack up until the groove is completely full of microbeads, which are stacked head to tail. This has the advantage of packing a large number of microbeads into a small area and prevents the microbeads from ever jumping out of the grooves. This approach could also be used to align the microbeads prior to injection into some form of flow cytometer, or a dispensing apparatus. -
FIGS. 18-23 show method and apparatus related to using a cytometer. -
FIG. 18 (a) shows steps for a method related to a conventional (single pass) flow cytometer reader andFIG. 18 (b) shows a method related to a disk cytometer reader (multipass). - In
FIG. 18 (a), the method generally indicated as 900 has a step for providing beads and a solution similar to step 1 inFIG. 1 ; and a step for reading information from the beads similar tosteps FIG. 1 . - In
FIG. 18 (b), the method generally indicated as 1000 has a step for providing beads and solution similar to step 1 inFIG. 1 ; and a step for spinning and reading information from the beads similar tosteps FIG. 1 . - In the methods shown in FIGS. 18(a) and (b), a rotating disk (see FIGS. 19(a), (b) and (c) and 20) is used for aligning the microbeads consistent with
step 2 of the process shown inFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 19 (a) shows an embodiment of a cytometer bead reader having a rotating disk generally indicated as 1250, having adisk platform 1252 with circumferential, concentric,grooves 1254 for aligningmicrobeads 8. As shown, therotating disk 1250 has various sectors for processing the microbeads, including abead loading zone 1256, abead removal zone 1258 and areadout zone 1260, as well as abarrier 1259 for preventing the microbeads from flying off the plate. As shown, awindow 1262 for reading the beads is in contact with the fluid containing the beads. -
FIG. 19 (b) shows an alternative embodiment of a rotating disk generally indicated as 1200, having adisk platform 1202 withplanar groove plates 1204 a, b, c, d, e, f that are shown with grooves oriented in any one or more different ways. One or more of theplanar groove plates 1204 a, b, c, d, e, f may have an optional channel for fluid run-off, as shown, and a barrier (FIG. 19 (a)) for preventing the microbeads from flying off the plate. All other attributes may be the same as described inFIG. 19 (a). A window 1263 may be used for loading and/or reading the beads on thegroove plates 1204 a, b, c, d, e, f. -
FIG. 19 (c) shows an alternative embodiment of a rotating disk generally indicated as 1280, having adisk platform 1282 withradial grooves disk platform 1282 has abead loading zone 1286 in the center of the disk. One advantage of this embodiment is that the opening of thebead loading zone 1286 will also serve to allow the release of air bubbles that will naturally collect in the center of the disk due the reduced density of the fluid, which results from the centrifugal force pushing the fluid radially outwardly. Therotating disk 1280 has tight bead packing due to the centrifugal forces due to the spinning action of the disk. Therotating disk 1280 has awedge shape spacer 1288 that keeps the channel at a constant gap width and awall 1290. -
FIG. 20 (a) shows an alternative embodiment of a rotating disk generally indicated as 1300 having narrowradial channels 1302 for spin drying so liquid is forced out of the circumferential grooves through the radial channels. Theplate 1300 may have amechanical catcher 1320 coupled thereto for moving radially outwardly indirection 1320 a if desired, for recirculating loose beads. -
FIG. 20 (b) show an alternative embodiment of adisk cytometer 1400 having amechanical iris 1402 for providing a variable aperture for bead access to grooves in accordance with the invention. -
FIG. 21 shows a rotating groove plate having 450 by 65 microns beads arranged in the rotating SU8 circumferential channels. - For any of the circular groove plates shown herein, the disk may rotate as discussed above and/or the reader excitation laser(s)/detector(s) may rotate to read the code and/or the fluorescence on the
beads 8. - The following are the processing steps for a continuous mode of operation:
- 1. Dispense batch of microbeads onto plate.
- 2. Spin slowly while agitating the plate theta x and y to get microbeads into grooves. The agitation can be performed using rocking, ultrasound, airflow, etc.
- 3. Once sufficient number of microbeads are in grooves, spin up plate to remove excess microbeads (microbeads that did not go into a groove).
- 4. Spin disk to read code and fluorescence.
- 5. To remove microbeads, purge with high velocity aqueous solution (enough to knock microbeads out of groove) and vacuum up, or spin microbeads off plate while they are not in a groove.
- 6. Inspect disk (probably with code camera) to verify that all microbeads have been removed.
- 7. Inject next batch of microbeads.
- In
FIG. 22 , instead of a flat grooved plate 200 (FIG. 3 ), the microbeads may be aligned in atube 502 that has a diameter that is only slightly larger than thesubstrate 10, e.g., about 1-50 microns, and that is substantially transparent to theincident light 24. In that case, theincident light 24 may pass through thetube 502 as indicated by the light 500 or be reflected back due to a reflective coating on thetube 502 or the substrate as shown byreturn light 504. Other techniques can be used for alignment if desired. -
FIG. 23 shows thetube 502 has anopening flange 512 for receiving the microbeads.FIG. 23 also shows anexcitation laser 550, adiode laser 552 and aCCD camera 554 for gathering information from thebead 8 consistent with that discussed above. If desired, thebeads 8 may be aligned and flowed through the tube 502 (similar to that discussed withFIG. 18 (a) flow cytometer). In that case, fluid (liquid and/or gas) may flow through thetube 508 to move thebeads 8 along thetube 502, using a flow cytometer approach. -
FIGS. 24-44 provide a method and apparatus for reading the code in themicrobeads 8, as well as a more detailed description of themicrobeads 8 and certain alternative embodiments therefore. The scope of the invention is not intended to be limited in any way to the manner in which the code is read, or the method of doing the same. - Referring to
FIG. 24 , The reflectedlight 27, comprises a plurality of beams 26-36 that pass through alens 37, which provides focused light beams 46-56, respectively, which are imaged onto aCCD camera 60. Thelens 37 and thecamera 60, and any other necessary electronics or optics for performing the functions described herein, make up thereader 29. Instead of or in addition to thelens 37, other imaging optics may be used to provide the desired characteristics of the optical image/signal onto the camera 60 (e.g., spots, lines, circles, ovals, etc.), depending on the shape of thesubstrate 10 and input optical signals. Also, instead of a CCD camera other devices may be used to read/capture the output light. - Referring to
FIG. 25 , the image on theCCD camera 60 is a series of illuminated stripes indicating ones and zeros of a digital pattern or code of the grating 12 in theelement 8. Referring toFIG. 26 ,lines 68 on agraph 70 are indicative of a digitized version of the image ofFIG. 25 as indicated in spatial periods (Λ1-Λn). - Each of the individual spatial periods (Λ1-Λn) in the grating 12 is slightly different, thus producing an array of N unique diffraction conditions (or diffraction angles) discussed more hereinafter. When the
element 8 is illuminated from the side, in the region of the grating 12, at an appropriate input angle, e.g., about 30 degrees, with a single input wavelength λ (monochromatic) source, the diffracted (or reflected) beams 26-36 are generated. Other input angles θi may be used if desired, depending on various design parameters as discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application, and provided that a known diffraction equation (Eq. 1 below) is satisfied:
sin(θi)+sin(θo)=mλ/nΛ Eq. 1
where Eq. 1 is diffraction (or reflection or scatter) relationship between input wavelength λ, input incident angle θi, output incident angle θo, and the spatial period Λ of the grating 12. Further, m is the “order” of the reflection being observed, and n is the refractive index of thesubstrate 10. The value of m=1 or first order reflection is acceptable for illustrative purposes. Eq. 1 applies to light incident on outer surfaces of thesubstrate 10 which are parallel to the longitudinal axis of the grating (or the kB vector). Because the angles θi,θo are defined outside thesubstrate 10 and because the effective refractive index of thesubstrate 10 is substantially a common value, the value of n in Eq. 1 cancels out of this equation. - Thus, for a given input wavelength λ, grating spacing Λ, and incident angle of the input light θi, the angle θo of the reflected output light may be determined. Solving Eq. 1 for θo and plugging in m=1, gives:
θo=sin−1(λ/Λ−sin(θi)) Eq. 2
For example, for an input wavelength λ=532 nm, a grating spacing Λ=0.532 microns (or 532 nm), and an input angle of incidence θi=30 degrees, the output angle of reflection will be θo=30 degrees. Alternatively, for an input wavelength λ=632 nm, a grating spacing Λ=0.532 microns (or 532 nm), and an input angle θi of 30 degrees, the output angle of reflection θo will be at 43.47 degrees, or for an input angle θi=37 degrees, the output angle of reflection will be θo=37 degrees. Any input angle that satisfies the design requirements discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application may be used. - In addition, to have sufficient optical output power and signal to noise ratio, the
output light 27 should fall within an acceptable portion of the Bragg envelope (or normalized reflection efficiency envelope)curve 200, as indicated bypoints curve 200 may be defined as:
where K=2πδn/λ, where, δn is the local refractive index modulation amplitude of the grating and λ is the input wavelength, sinc(x)=sin(x)/x, and the vectors ki=2πcos(θi)/λ and ko=2πcos (θo)/λ are the projections of the incident light and the output (or reflected) light, respectively, onto the line 203 normal to the axial direction of the grating 12 (or the grating vector kB), D is the thickness or depth of the grating 12 as measured along the line 203 (normal to the axial direction of the grating 12). Other substrate shapes than a cylinder may be used and will exhibit a similar peaked characteristic of the Bragg envelope. We have found that a value for δn of about 10−4 in the grating region of the substrate is acceptable; however, other values may be used if desired. - Rewriting Eq. 3 gives the reflection efficiency profile of the Bragg envelope as:
- Thus, when the input angle θi is equal to the output (or reflected) angle θo (i.e., θi=θo), the reflection efficiency I (Eqs. 3 & 4) is maximized, which is at the center or peak of the Bragg envelope. When θi=θo, the input light angle is referred to as the Bragg angle as is known. The efficiency decreases for other input and output angles (i.e., θi # θ), as defined by Eqs. 3 & 4. Thus, for maximum reflection efficiency and thus output light power, for a given grating pitch Λ and input wavelength, the angle θi of the
input light 24 should be set so that the angle θo of the reflected output light equals the input angle θi. - Also, as the thickness or diameter D of the grating decreases, the width of the sin(x)/x function (and thus the width of the Bragg envelope) increases and, the coefficient to or amplitude of the sinc2 (or (sin(x)/x)2 function (and thus the efficiency level across the Bragg envelope) also increases, and vice versa. Further, as the wavelength λ increases, the half-width of the Bragg envelope as well as the efficiency level across the Bragg envelope both decrease. Thus, there is a trade-off between the brightness of an individual bit and the number of bits available under the Bragg envelope. Ideally, δn should be made as large as possible to maximize the brightness, which allows D to be made smaller.
- From Eq. 3 and 4, the half-angle of the Bragg envelope θB is defined as:
where η is a reflection efficiency factor which is the value for x in the sinc2(x) function where the value of sinc2(x) has decreased to a predetermined value from the maximum amplitude as indicated bypoints curve 200. - We have found that the reflection efficiency is acceptable when η≦1.39. This value for η corresponds to when the amplitude of the reflected beam (i.e., from the sinc2(x) function of Eqs. 3 & 4) has decayed to about 50% of its peak value. In particular, when x=1.39=η, sinc2(x)=0.5. However, other values for efficiency thresholds or factor in the Bragg envelope may be used if desired.
- The beams 26-36 are imaged onto the
CCD camera 60 to produce the pattern of light and dark regions 120-132 representing a digital (or binary) code, where light=1 and dark=0 (or vice versa). The digital code may be generated by selectively creating individual index variations (or individual gratings) with the desired spatial periods Λ1-Λn. Other illumination, readout techniques, types of gratings, geometries, materials, etc. may be used as discussed in the aforementioned patent application. - Referring to
FIG. 26 , illustrations (a)-(c), for the grating 12 in acylindrical substrate 10 having a sample spectral 17 bit code (i.e., 17 different pitches Λ1-Λ17), the corresponding image on the CCD (Charge Coupled Device)camera 60 is shown for a digital pattern of 7 bits turned on (10110010001001001); 9 bits turned on of (1000101010100111); all 17 bits turned on of (11111111111111111). - For the images in
FIG. 26 , the length of thesubstrate 10 was 450 microns, the outer diameter D1 was 65 microns, the inner diameter D was 14 microns, δn for the grating 12 was about 10−4, n1 inportion 20 was about 1.458 (at a wavelength of about 1550 nm), n2 inportion 18 was about 1.453, the average pitch spacing Λ for the grating 12 was about 0.542 microns, and the spacing between pitches ΔΛ was about 0.36% of the adjacent pitches Λ. - Referring to
FIG. 27 , illustration (a), the pitch Λ of an individual grating is the axial spatial period of the sinusoidal variation in the refractive index n1 in theregion 20 of thesubstrate 10 along the axial length of the grating 12 as indicated by acurve 90 on a graph 91. Referring toFIG. 27 , illustration (b), a sample composite grating 12 comprises three individual gratings that are co-located on thesubstrate 10, each individual grating having slightly different pitches, Λ1, Λ2, Λ3, respectively, and the difference (or spacing) ΔΛ between each pitch Λ being about 3.0% of the period of an adjacent pitch Λ as indicated by a series ofcurves 92 on agraph 94. Referring toFIG. 27 , illustration (c), three individual gratings, each having slightly different pitches, Λ1, Λ2, Λ3, respectively, are shown, the difference AA between each pitch Λ being about 0.3% of the pitch Λ of the adjacent pitch as shown by a series ofcurves 95 on agraph 97. The individual gratings inFIG. 27 , illustrations (b) and (c) are shown to all start at 0 for illustration purposes; however, it should be understood that, the separate gratings need not all start in phase with each other. Referring toFIG. 27 , illustration (d), the overlapping of the individual sinusoidal refractive index variation pitches Λ1-Λn in thegrating region 20 of thesubstrate 10, produces a combined resultant refractive index variation in thecomposite grating 12 shown as acurve 96 on agraph 98 representing the combination of the three pitches shown inFIG. 27 , illustration (b). Accordingly, the resultant refractive index variation in thegrating region 20 of thesubstrate 10 may not be sinusoidal and is a combination of the individual pitches Λ (or index variation). - The maximum number of resolvable bits N, which is equal to the number of different grating pitches Λ (and hence the number of codes), that can be accurately read (or resolved) using side-illumination and side-reading of the grating 12 in the
substrate 10, is determined by numerous factors, including: the beam width w incident on the substrate (and the corresponding substrate length L and grating length Lg), the thickness or diameter D of the grating 12, the wavelength λ of incident light, the beam divergence angle θR, and the width of the Bragg envelope θB (discussed more in the aforementioned patent application), and may be determined by the equation: - Referring to
FIG. 28 , instead of having theinput light 24 at a single wavelength λ (monochromatic) and reading the bits by the angle θo of the output light, the bits (or grating pitches Λ) may be read/detected by providing a plurality of wavelengths and reading the wavelength spectrum of the reflected output light signal. In this case, there would be one bit per wavelength, and thus, the code is contained in the wavelength information of the reflected output signal. - In this case, each bit (or Λ) is defined by whether its corresponding wavelength falls within the Bragg envelope, not by its angular position within the
Bragg envelope 200. As a result, it is not limited by the number of angles that can fit in theBragg envelope 200 for a given composite grating 12, as in the embodiment discussed hereinbefore. Thus, using multiple wavelengths, the only limitation in the number of bits N is the maximum number of grating pitches Λ that can be superimposed and optically distinguished in wavelength space for the output beam. - Referring to
FIGS. 28 and 29 , illustration (a), the reflection wavelength spectrum (λ1-λn) of the reflectedoutput beam 310 will exhibit a series of reflection peaks 695, each appearing at the same output Bragg angle θo. Each wavelength peak 695 (λ1-λn) corresponds to an associated spatial period (Λ1-Λn), which make up thegrating 12. - One way to measure the bits in wavelength space is to have the input light angle θi equal to the output light angle θo, which is kept at a constant value, and to provide an input wavelength λ that satisfies the diffraction condition (Eq. 1) for each grating pitch Λ. This will maximize the optical power of the output signal for each pitch Λ detected in the
grating 12. - Referring to 29, illustration (b), the transmission wavelength spectrum of the transmitted output beam 330 (which is transmitted straight through the grating 12) will exhibit a series of notches (or dark spots) 696. Alternatively, instead of detecting the reflected
output light 310, the transmitted light 330 may be detected at the detector/reader 308. It should be understood that the optical signal levels for the reflection peaks 695 andtransmission notches 696 will depend on the “strength” of the grating 12, i.e., the magnitude of the index variation n in thegrating 12. - In
FIG. 28 , the bits may be detected by continuously scanning the input wavelength. A knownoptical source 300 provides the inputlight signal 24 of a coherent scanned wavelength input light shown as agraph 304. Thesource 300 provides a sync signal on aline 306 to a knownreader 308. The sync signal may be a timed pulse or a voltage ramped signal, which is indicative of the wavelength being provided as theinput light 24 to thesubstrate 10 at any given time. Thereader 308 may be a photodiode, CCD camera, or other optical detection device that detects when an optical signal is present and provides an output signal on aline 309 indicative of the code in thesubstrate 10 or of the wavelengths present in the output light, which is directly related to the code, as discussed herein. The grating 12 reflects theinput light 24 and provides anoutput light signal 310 to thereader 308. The wavelength of the input signal is set such that the reflectedoutput light 310 will be substantially in thecenter 314 of theBragg envelope 200 for the individual grating pitch (or bit) being read. - Alternatively, the
source 300 may provide a continuous broadband wavelength input signal such as that shown as agraph 316. In that case, the reflectedoutput beam 310 signal is provided to a narrowband scanning filter 318 which scans across the desired range of wavelengths and provides a filtered outputoptical signal 320 to thereader 308. Thefilter 318 provides a sync signal on aline 322 to the reader, which is indicative of which wavelengths are being provided on theoutput signal 320 to the reader and may be similar to the sync signal discussed hereinbefore on theline 306 from thesource 300. In this case, thesource 300 does not need to provide a sync signal because the inputoptical signal 24 is continuous. Alternatively, instead of having the scanning filter being located in the path of theoutput beam 310, the scanning filter may be located in the path of theinput beam 24 as indicated by the dashedbox 324, which provides the sync signal on aline 323. - Alternatively, instead of the scanning filters 318,324, the
reader 308 may be a known optical spectrometer (such as a known spectrum analyzer), capable of measuring the wavelength of the output light. - The desired values for the input wavelengths λ (or wavelength range) for the
input signal 24 from thesource 300 may be determined from the Bragg condition of Eq. 1, for a given grating spacing Λ and equal angles for the input light θi and the angle light θo. Solving Eq. 1 for λ and plugging in m=1, gives:
λ=Λ[sin(θo)+sin(θi)] Eq. 7 - It is also possible to combine the angular-based code detection with the wavelength-based code detection, both discussed hereinbefore. In this case, each readout wavelength is associated with a predetermined number of bits within the Bragg envelope. Bits (or grating pitches Λ) written for different wavelengths do not show up unless the correct wavelength is used.
- Accordingly, the bits (or grating pitches Λ) can be read using one wavelength and many angles, many wavelengths and one angle, or many wavelengths and many angles.
- Referring to
FIG. 30 , the grating 12 may have a thickness or depth D which is comparable or smaller than the incident beam wavelength λ. This is known as a “thin” diffraction grating (or the full angle Bragg envelope is 180 degrees). In that case, the half-angle Bragg envelope θB is substantially 90 degrees; however, δn must be made large enough to provide sufficient reflection efficiency, per Eqs. 3 and 4. In particular, for a “thin” grating, D*δn≈λ/2, which corresponds to a π phase shift between adjacent minimum and maximum refractive index values of the grating 12. - It should be understood that there is still a trade-off discussed hereinbefore with beam divergence angle θR and the incident beam width (or length L of the substrate), but the accessible angular space is theoretically now 90 degrees. Also, for maximum efficiency, the phase shift between adjacent minimum and maximum refractive index values of the grating 12 should approach a π phase shift; however, other phase shifts may be used.
- In this case, rather than having the
input light 24 coming in at the conventional Bragg input angle θi, as discussed hereinbefore and indicated by a dashedline 701, the grating 12 is illuminated with the input light 24 oriented on aline 705 orthogonal to the longitudinalgrating vector 705. Theinput beam 24 will split into two (or more) beams of equal amplitude, where the exit angle θo can be determined from Eq. 1 with the input angle θi=0 (normal to the longitudinal axis of the grating 12). - In particular, from Eq. 1, for a given grating pitch Λ1, the +/−1st order beams (m=++1 and m=−1), corresponds to
output beams output beams beam 708 and passes straight through the substrate. The output beams 700-708 project spectral spots or peaks 710-718, respectively, along a common plane, shown from the side by aline 709, which is parallel to the upper surface of thesubstrate 10. - For example, for a grating pitch Λ=1.0 um, and an input wavelength λ=400 nm, the exit angles θo are ˜+/−23.6 degrees (for m=+/−1), and +/−53.1 degrees (from m=+/−2), from Eq. 1. It should be understood that for certain wavelengths, certain orders (e.g., m=+/−2) may be reflected back toward the input side or otherwise not detectable at the output side of the grating 12.
- Alternatively, one can use only the +/−1st order (m=+/−1) output beams for the code, in which case there would be only 2 peaks to detect, 712, 714. Alternatively, one can also use any one or more pairs from any order output beam that is capable of being detected. Alternatively, instead of using a pair of output peaks for a given order, an individual peak may be used.
- Referring to
FIG. 31 , if two pitches Λ1,Λ2 exist in the grating 12, two sets of peaks will exist. In particular, for a second grating pitch Λ2, the +/−1st order beams (m=+1 and m=−1), corresponds tooutput beams output beams beam 718 and passes straight through the substrate. The output beams 720-726 corresponding to the second pitch Λ2 project spectral spots or peaks 730-736, respectively, which are at a different location than the point 710-716, but along the same common plane, shown from the side by theline 709. - Thus, for a given pitch Λ (or bit) in a grating, a set of spectral peaks will appear at a specific location in space. Thus, each different pitch corresponds to a different elevation or output angle which corresponds to a predetermined set of spectral peaks. Accordingly, the presence or absence of a particular peak or set of spectral peaks defines the code.
- In general, if the angle of the grating 12 is not properly aligned with respect to the mechanical longitudinal axis of the
substrate 10, the readout angles may no longer be symmetric, leading to possible difficulties in readout. With a thin grating, the angular sensitivity to the alignment of the longitudinal axis of thesubstrate 10 to the input angle θi of incident radiation is reduced or eliminated. In particular, the input light can be oriented along substantially any angle θi with respect to the grating 12 without causing output signal degradation, due the large Bragg angle envelope. Also, if theincident beam 24 is normal to thesubstrate 10, the grating 12 can be oriented at any rotational (or azimuthal) angle without causing output signal degradation. However, in each of these cases, changing the incident angle θi will affect the output angle θo of the reflected light in a predetermined predictable way, thereby allowing for accurate output code signal detection or compensation. - Referring to
FIG. 32 , for a thin grating, in addition to multiplexing in the elevation or output angle based on grating pitch Λ, the bits can also be multiplexed in an azimuthal (or rotational) angle θa of the substrate. In particular, a plurality ofgratings surface 701 of thesubstrate 10 and located in the plane of thesubstrate surface 701. Theinput light 24 is incident on all thegratings grating 750 provides the output beams 764,762, thegrating 752 provides the output beams 766,768, thegrating 754 provides the output beams 770,772, and the grating 756 provides the output beams 774,776. Each of the output beams provides spectral peaks or spots (similar to that discussed hereinbefore), which are located in aplane 760 that is parallel to thesubstrate surface plane 701. In this case, a single grating pitch Λ can produce many bits depending on the number of gratings that can be placed at different azimuthal (rotational) angles on the surface of thesubstrate 10 and the number of output beam spectral peaks that can be spatially and optically resolved/detected. Each bit may be viewed as the presence or absence of a pair of peaks located at a predetermined location in space in theplane 760. Note that this example uses only the m=+/−1st order for each reflected output beam. Alternatively, the detection may also use the m=+/−2nd order. In that case, there would be two additional output beams and peaks (not shown) for each grating (as discussed hereinbefore) that may lie in the same plane as theplane 760 and may be on a concentric circle outside thecircle 760. - In addition, the azimuthal multiplexing can be combined with the elevation or output angle multiplexing discussed hereinbefore to provide two levels of multiplexing. Accordingly, for a thin grating, the number of bits can be multiplexed based on the number of grating pitches Λ and/or geometrically by the orientation of the grating pitches.
- Furthermore, if the input light angle θi is normal to the
substrate 10, the edges of thesubstrate 10 no longer scatter light from the incident angle into the “code angular space”, as discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application. - Also, in the thin grating geometry, a continuous broadband wavelength source may be used as the optical source if desired.
- Referring to
FIG. 33 , instead of or in addition to the pitches Λ in the grating 12 being oriented normal to the longitudinal axis, the pitches may be created at a angle θg. In that case, when theinput light 24 is incident normal to thesurface 792, will produce a reflectedoutput beam 790 having an angle θo determined by Eq. 1 as adjusted for the blaze angle θg. This can provide another level of multiplexing bits in the code. - Referring to
FIG. 34 , instead of using an optical binary (0-1) code, an additional level of multiplexing may be provided by having the optical code use other numerical bases, if intensity levels of each bit are used to indicate code information. This could be achieved by having a corresponding magnitude (or strength) of the refractive index change (δn) for each grating pitch Λ. Four intensity ranges are shown for each bit number or pitch Λ, providing for a Base-4 code (where each bit corresponds to 0,1,2, or 3). The lowest intensity level, corresponding to a 0, would exist when this pitch Λ is not present in thegrating 12. Thenext intensity level 450 would occur when a first low level δn1 exists in the grating that provides an output signal within the intensity range corresponding to a 1. Thenext intensity level 452 would occur when a second higher level δn2 exists in the grating 12 that provides an output signal within the intensity range corresponding to a 2. Thenext intensity level 452, would occur when a third higher level δn3 exists in the grating 12 that provides an output signal within the intensity range corresponding to a 3. - Referring to
FIG. 35 , theinput light 24 may be incident on thesubstrate 10 on anend face 600 of thesubstrate 10. In that case, theinput light 24 will be incident on the grating 12 having a more significant component of the light (as compared to side illumination discussed hereinbefore) along the longitudinalgrating axis 207 of the grating (along the grating vector kB), as shown by aline 602. The light 602 reflects off the grating 12 as indicated by aline 604 and exits the substrate asoutput light 608. Accordingly, it should be understood by one skilled in the art that the diffraction equations discussed hereinbefore regarding output diffraction angle θo also apply in this case except that the reference axis would now be thegrating axis 207. Thus, in this case, the input and output light angles θi,θo, would be measured from thegrating axis 207 and length Lg of the grating 12 would become the thickness or depth D of the grating 12. As a result, a grating 12 that is 400 microns long, would result in theBragg envelope 200 being narrow. It should be understood that because the values of n1 and n2 are close to the same value, the slight angle changes of the light between theregions - In the case where
incident light 610 is incident along the same direction as the grating vector (Kb) 207, i.e., θi=0 degrees, the incident light sees the whole length Lg of the grating 12 and the grating provides a reflected output light angle θo=0 degrees, and theBragg envelope 612 becomes extremely narrow, as the narrowing effect discussed above reaches a limit. In that case, the relationship between a given pitch Λ in the grating 12 and the wavelength of reflection λ is governed by a known “Bragg grating” relation:
λ=2 n eff Λ Eq. 8
where neff is the effective index of refraction of the substrate, λ is the input (and output wavelength) and Λ is the pitch. This relation, as is known, may be derived from Eq. 1 where θi=θo=90 degrees. - In that case, the code information is readable only in the spectral wavelength of the reflected beam, similar to that discussed hereinbefore for wavelength based code reading. Accordingly, the input signal in this case may be a scanned wavelength source or a broadband wavelength source. In addition, as discussed hereinbefore for wavelength based code reading, the code information may be obtained in reflection from the reflected
beam 614 or in transmission by the transmittedbeam 616 that passes through thegrating 12. - It should be understood that for shapes of the
substrate 10 orelement 8 other than a cylinder, the effect of various different shapes on the propagation of input light through theelement 8,substrate 10, and/or grating 12, and the associated reflection angles, can be determined using known optical physics including Snell's Law, shown below:
n in sin θin=n out sin θout Eq. 9 - where nin is the refractive index of the first (input) medium, and nout is the refractive index of the second (output) medium, and θin and θout are measured from a line 620 normal to an incident surface 622.
- Referring to
FIG. 36 , if the value of n1 in thegrating region 20 is greater than the value of n2 in thenon-grating region 18, thegrating region 20 of thesubstrate 10 will act as a known optical waveguide for certain wavelengths. In that case, thegrating region 20 acts as a “core” along which light is guided and theouter region 18 acts as a “cladding” which helps confine or guide the light. Also, such a waveguide will have a known “numerical aperture” (θna) that will allow light that is within the aperture θna to be directed or guided along thegrating axis 207 and reflected axially off the grating 12 and returned and guided along the waveguide. In that case, the grating 12 will reflect light having the appropriate wavelengths equal to the pitches Λ present in the grating 12 back along the region 20 (or core) of the waveguide, and pass the remaining wavelengths of light as the light 632. Thus, having thegrating region 20 act as an optical waveguide for wavelengths reflected by the grating 12 allows incident light that is not aligned exactly with thegrating axis 207 to be guided along and aligned with the grating 12axis 207 for optimal grating reflection. - If an optical waveguide is used any standard waveguide may be used, e.g., a standard telecommunication single mode optical fiber (125 micron diameter or 80 micron diameter fiber with about a 8-10 micron diameter), or a larger diameter waveguide (greater than 0.5 mm diameter), such as is describe in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/455,868, filed Dec. 6, 1999, entitled “Large Diameter Waveguide, Grating”. Further, any type of optical waveguide may be used for the
optical substrate 10, such as, a multi-mode, birefringent, polarization maintaining, polarizing, multi-core, multi-cladding, or microsturctured optical waveguide, or a flat or planar waveguide (where the waveguide is rectangular shaped), or other waveguides. Any other dimensions may be used for the waveguide if desired, provided they meet the functional and performance requirements of the application taking into account the teachings herein. - Referring to
FIG. 37 , if the grating 12 extends across the entire dimension D of the substrate, thesubstrate 10 does not behave as a waveguide for the incident or reflected light and theincident light 24 will be diffracted (or reflected) as indicated bylines 642, and the codes detected as discussed hereinbefore for the end-incidence condition discussed hereinbefore withFIG. 45 , and the remaining light 640 passes straight through. - Referring to
FIG. 38 , illustrations (a)-(c), in illustration (a), for the end illumination condition, if a blazed or angled grating is used, as discussed hereinbefore, theinput light 24 is coupled out of thesubstrate 10 at a known angle as shown by aline 650. Referring toFIG. 38 , illustration (b), alternatively, theinput light 24 may be incident from the side and, if the grating 12 has the appropriate blaze angle, the reflected light will exit from theend face 652 as indicated by aline 654. Referring toFIG. 38 , illustration (c), the grating 12 may have a plurality of different pitch angles 660,662, which reflect theinput light 24 to different output angles as indicated bylines - The grating 12 may be impressed in the
substrate 10 by any technique for writing, impressed, embedded, imprinted, or otherwise forming a diffraction grating in the volume of or on a surface of asubstrate 10. Examples of some known techniques are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,725,110 and 4,807,950, entitled “Method for Impressing Gratings Within Fiber Optics”, to Glenn et al; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,388,173, entitled “Method and Apparatus for Forming Aperiodic Gratings in Optical Fibers”, to Glenn, respectively, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,367,588, entitled “Method of Fabricating Bragg Gratings Using a Silica Glass Phase Grating Mask and Mask Used by Same”, to Hill, and U.S. Pat. No. 3,916,182, entitled “Periodic Dielectric Waveguide Filter”, Dabby et al, and U.S. Pat. No. 3,891,302, entitled “Method of Filtering Modes in Optical Waveguides”, to Dabby et al, which are all incorporated herein by reference to the extent necessary to understand the present invention. - Alternatively, instead of the grating 12 being impressed within the substrate material, the grating 12 may be partially or totally created by etching or otherwise altering the outer surface geometry of the substrate to create a corrugated or varying surface geometry of the substrate, such as is described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,891,302, entitled “Method of Filtering Modes in Optical Waveguides”, to Dabby et al, which is incorporated herein by reference to the extent necessary to understand the present invention, provided the resultant optical refractive profile for the desired code is created.
- Further, alternatively, the grating 12 may be made by depositing dielectric layers onto the substrate, similar to the way a known thin film filter is created, so as to create the desired resultant optical refractive profile for the desired code.
- The substrate 10 (and/or the element 8) may have end-view cross-sectional shapes other than circular, such as square, rectangular, elliptical, clam-shell, D-shaped, or other shapes, and may have side-view sectional shapes other than rectangular, such as circular, square, elliptical, clam-shell, D-shaped, or other shapes. Also, 3D geometries other than a cylinder may be used, such as a sphere, a cube, a pyramid or any other 3D shape. Alternatively, the
substrate 10 may have a geometry that is a combination of one or more of the foregoing shapes. - The shape of the
element 8 and the size of the incident beam may be made to minimize any end scatter off the end face(s) of theelement 8, as is discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application. Accordingly, to minimize such scatter, theincident beam 24 may be oval shaped where the narrow portion of the oval is smaller than the diameter D1, and the long portion of the oval is smaller than the length L of theelement 8. Alternatively, the shape of the end faces may be rounded or other shapes or may be coated with an antireflective coating. - It should be understood that the size of any given dimension for the
region 20 of the grating 12 may be less than any corresponding dimension of thesubstrate 10. For example, if the grating 12 has dimensions of length Lg, depth Dg, and width Wg, and thesubstrate 12 has different dimensions of length L, depth D, and width W, the dimensions of the grating 12 may be less than that of thesubstrate 12. Thus, the grating 12, may be embedded within or part of a muchlarger substrate 12. Also, theelement 8 may be embedded or formed in or on a larger object for identification of the object. - The dimensions, geometries, materials, and material properties of the
substrate 10 are selected such that the desired optical and material properties are met for a given application. The resolution and range for the optical codes are scalable by controlling these parameters as discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application. - Referring to
FIG. 39 , thesubstrate 10 may have anouter coating 799, such as a polymer or other material that may be dissimilar to the material of thesubstrate 10, provided that thecoating 799 on at least a portion of the substrate, allows sufficient light to pass through the substrate for adequate optical detection of the code. Thecoating 799 may be on any one or more sides of thesubstrate 10. Also, thecoating 799 may be a material that causes theelement 8 to float or sink in certain fluids (liquid and/or gas) solutions. - Also, the
substrate 10 may be made of a material that is less dense than certain fluid (liquids and/or gas) solutions, thereby allowing theelements 8 to float or be buoyant or partially buoyant. Also, the substrate may be made of a porous material, such as controlled pore glass (CPG) or other porous material, which may also reduce the density of theelement 8 and may make theelement 8 buoyant or partially-buoyant in certain fluids. - Referring to
FIG. 40 , the grating 12 is axially spatially invariant. As a result, thesubstrate 10 with the grating 12 (shown as a long substrate 21) may be axially subdivided or cut into many separate smaller substrates 30-36 and each substrate 30-36 will contain the same code as thelonger substrate 21 had before it was cut. The limit on the size of the smaller substrates 30-36 is based on design and performance factors discussed herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application. - Referring to
FIG. 41 , one purpose of the outer region 18 (or region without the grating 12) of thesubstrate 10 is to provide mechanical or structural support for the innergrating region 20. Accordingly, theentire substrate 10 may comprise the grating 12, if desired. Alternatively, the support portion may be completely or partially beneath, above, or along one or more sides of thegrating region 20, such as in a planar geometry, or a D-shaped geometry, or other geometries, as described herein and/or in the aforementioned patent application. Thenon-grating portion 18 of thesubstrate 10 may be used for other purposes as well, such as optical lensing effects or other effects (discussed herein or in the aforementioned patent application). Also, the end faces of thesubstrate 10 need not be perpendicular to the sides or parallel to each other. However, for applications where theelements 8 are stacked end-to-end, the packing density may be optimized if the end faces are perpendicular to the sides. - Referring to
FIG. 42 , illustrations (a)-(c), two ormore substrates element 8, e.g., by an adhesive, fusing or other attachment techniques. In that case, thegratings - Referring to
FIG. 43 , illustrations (a) and (b), thesubstrate 10 may havemultiple regions gratings substrate 10. - Referring to
FIG. 44 , the length L of theelement 8 may be shorter than its diameter D, thus, having a geometry such as a plug, puck, wafer, disc or plate. - Referring to
FIG. 45 to facilitate proper alignment of the grating axis with the angle θi of theinput beam 24, thesubstrate 10 may have a plurality of thegratings 12 having the same codes written therein at numerous different angular or rotational (or azimuthal) positions of thesubstrate 10. In particular, twogratings grating axes axes incident light 24 is aligned properly with the grating 550 and is not aligned with the grating 552, such thatoutput light 555 is reflected off thegrating 550 and light 557 passes through the grating 550 as discussed herein. If theelement 8 is rotated as shown by thearrows 559, the angle θi of incident light 24 will become aligned properly with the grating 552 and not aligned with the grating 550 such thatoutput light 555 is reflected off thegrating 552 and light 557 passes through thegrating 552. When multiple gratings are located in this rotational orientation, the bead may be rotated as indicated by aline 559 and there may be many angular positions that will provide correct (or optimal) incident input angles θi to the grating. While this example shows a circular cross-section, this technique may be used with any shape cross-section. - Referring to
FIG. 46 , illustrations (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) thesubstrate 10 may have one or more holes located within thesubstrate 10. In illustration (a), holes 560 may be located at various points along all or a portion of the length of thesubstrate 10. The holes need not pass all the way through thesubstrate 10. Any number, size and spacing for the holes 560 may be used if desired. In illustration (b), holes 572 may be located very close together to form a honeycomb-like area of all or a portion of the cross-section. In illustration (c), one (or more)inner hole 566 may be located in the center of thesubstrate 10 or anywhere inside of where the grating region(s) 20 are located. Theinner hole 566 may be coated with areflective coating 573 to reflect light to facilitate reading of one or more of thegratings 12 and/or to reflect light diffracted off one or more of thegratings 12. Theincident light 24 may reflect off the grating 12 in theregion 20 and then reflect off thesurface 573 to provideoutput light 577. Alternatively, theincident light 24 may reflect off thesurface 573, then reflect off the grating 12 and provide theoutput light 575. In that case thegrating region 20 may run axially or circumferentially 571 around thesubstrate 10. In illustration (d), the holes 579 may be located circumferentially around thegrating region 20 or transversely across thesubstrate 10. In illustration (e), the grating 12 may be located circumferentially around the outside of thesubstrate 10, and there may beholes 574 inside thesubstrate 10. - Referring to
FIG. 47 , illustrations (a), (b), and (c), thesubstrate 10 may have one or more protruding portions orteeth substrate 10. Alternatively, theteeth - Referring to
FIG. 48 , illustrations (a), (b), (c) a D-shaped substrate, a flat-sided substrate and an eye-shaped (or clam-shell or teardrop shaped)substrate 10, respectively, are shown. Also, thegrating region 20 may have end cross-sectional shapes other than circular and may have side cross-sectional shapes other than rectangular, such as any of the geometries described herein for thesubstrate 10. For example, thegrating region 20 may have a oval cross-sectional shape as shown by dashedlines 581, which may be oriented in a desired direction, consistent with the teachings herein. Any other geometries for thesubstrate 10 or thegrating region 20 may be used if desired, as described herein. - Referring to
FIG. 49 , at least a portion of a side of thesubstrate 10 may be coated with a reflective coating to allow incident light 510 to be reflected back to the same side from which the incident light came, as indicated by reflectedlight 512. - Referring to
FIG. 50 , illustrations (a) and (b), alternatively, thesubstrate 10 can be electrically and/or magnetically polarized, by a dopant or coating, which may be used to ease handling and/or alignment or orientation of thesubstrate 10 and/or the grating 12, or used for other purposes. Alternatively, the bead may be coated with conductive material, e.g., metal coating on the inside of a holy substrate, or metallic dopant inside the substrate. In these cases, such materials can cause thesubstrate 10 to align in an electric or magnetic field. Alternatively, the substrate can be doped with an element or compound that fluoresces or glows under appropriate illumination, e.g., a rare earth dopant, such as Erbium, or other rare earth dopant or fluorescent or luminescent molecule. In that case, such fluorescence or luminescence may aid in locating and/or aligning substrates. - Referring to
FIGS. 55 and 56 , the bead cell, chamber, orcuvettes FIG. 55 , for a cell havingcircular grooves 1258, the cell may have a plurality ofseparate sections 902 which are physically separated from each other by barriers, 904. In that case, the beads may be loaded through separate holes orports 906, which communicate only with an associatedsection 902. Thesections 902 may be mechanically isolated, so that thebeads 8 placed in a givensection 902 all remain in that section, and/or fluidically isolated, so that any fluid with thebeads 8 placed in a givensection 902 remains in that section with no cross-over into anyother section 902. - Further, referring to
FIG. 56 , for a cell havingstraight grooves 205, thecell 940 may have a plurality ofseparate sections 942 which are physically separated from each other by barriers, 944. In that case, the beads may be loaded through separate holes orports 946, which communicate only with an associatedsection 942. Thesections 942 may be mechanically isolated, so that thebeads 8 placed in a givensection 942 all remain in that section, and/or fluidically isolated, so that any fluid with thebeads 8 placed in a givensection 942 remains in that section with no cross-over into anyother section 942. - Referring to
FIG. 57 , one example of asectored cell 920 withstraight grooves 205 has abase groove plate 930, aspacer 932, and acover 934. The groove plate may be made of fused silica, borosilicate glass, or plastic, acrylic, Zeonex made by Zeon Corp. or any other support material that is transparent or substantially transparent to desired incident wavelength light or can be made of reflective by coating a transparent material or using a reflective material, such as silicon or other support material that reflects the desired wavelengths of incident light. Also, thegroove plate 930 may be made of a material that has minimal fluorescence to minimize background fluorescence in the desired fluorescence wavelength range, for applications where fluorescence of thebeads 8 is measured. - The
base plate 930 has a substantially circular shape having a diameter of about 100 mm, with a mechanical alignment key or notch 952 about 32.5 mm long, which may be used for mechanical alignment during wafer fabrication of thegroove plate 930. Thethickness 948 is about 1 mm. Thebase plate 930 has thegrooves 205 therein, which may be formed by direct reactive ion etching (REI) of theglass base plate 930, photo-patterning with photoresist, photoresist and plating process, or any other process that provides thegrooves 205 that meet the requirements for the application. Thesectors 944 have alength 950 of about 50 mm. Also, one or more reference lines 948 (or fiducials) may be provided for reader head alignment with thegrooves 205. Thelength 940 of each grooved section orsector 944 is about 7 mm and thespace 946 between eachsection 944 is about 2 mm. Thegrooves 205 are about 34 microns by 24 microns deep and have about a 55 micron pitch spacing. For a 7 mm long groove, eachgroove 205 would hold about 28 cylindrically shapedbeads 8 eachbead 8 having a dimension of about 30 microns in diameter and 250 microns in length. Thesectors 944 having a length of about 50 mm, may have about 900 grooves and hold a total capacity about 25,200beads 8. While the number of physically separatedsectors 944 in thecell 938 shown is eight, any number of sectors may be used if desired. - Referring to
FIG. 58 , thegrooves 205 have a depth of about 22 to 24 microns, and have a top width of about 34 microns, and abase width 953 of about 30 microns for θg=5 deg., and a spacing pitch of about 55 microns, for abead 8 having a diameter D1 of about 28 micons. Theside walls 958 may have an angle θg of about 0 to 10 degrees. Other angles may be used, depending on the application, e.g., whether the beads will be removed from the plate and how they will be removed. - For example, referring to
FIG. 58 , with the angle θg is between 0 and about 10 degrees the beads may be flushed or washed out of thegrooves 205 with fluid flow transversely across the top of thegrooves 205, using a fluid flow rate of about 3 to 6 ml/second cleans out the beads. The flush may be done with dionized water, regular water, saline, detergent with water, or other liquid. Using a detergent reduces the viscosity and surface tension so beads do not stick to the surface of the cell. The angle θg may be greater than 10 degrees if desired, depending on certain design parameters, including, flush flow rate, groove-to-groove separation, and groove depth. Alternatively, if the angle θg is less than 0 deg., the beads will be more likely to stay in thegrooves 205. - Other dimensions and geometries for the
groove plate 930,grooves 205,spacer 932, and cover 934 and/or for any features or characteristics thereof may be used if desired. - The present invention, which is predicated on two observations, eliminates the need for mechanically distributing beads. The first observation is that small particles are easily moved by a fluid stream, and the orientation of cylindrical particles is generally with the long axis of the particle perpendicular to the direction of the flow. And the second is that particles in a liquid can be moved in a particular direction by a temporally asymmetric oscillatory flow. Regarding the later, it was observed that when an oscillatory flow was used in a closed fluidic cell containing cylindrical glass particles, whereby the rate of the outgoing wave was higher than the return wave, the particles would acquire a net displacement in the direction of the outgoing wave. When the flow rates were reversed, i.e. when the outgoing wave was slower than the return wave, the particles moved inward. Again it was observed that the particles would tend to orient perpendicular to the direction of the pressure wave.
- This behavior was first observed using a closed fluidic cell in the shape of a round disk with a floor and ceiling spaced by approximately 500 micron. The cell was entirely closed except for a hole in the center of the top, which allowed the particles (400×40 um cylindrical glass “beads”) to be inserted into the center of the cell. An asymmetric flow was established by tapping the bottom of the cell with a blunt object. A time sequence is shown
FIG. 1 (a-f), illustrating how the particles form a ring shaped pattern and how the size of the ring increased, indicating that the particles were moving outward, after a series of pulses were applied in one direction.FIG. 1 (g−1), illustrate how the size of the ring decreased after the direction of the pulses was reversed. In subsequent experiments, oscillatory flow was established by coupling fluid through the open port in the top of the cell. The general behavior of the cell was the same in either case. By applying rapid pressure pulses, coupled through a flexible tube inserted into the center hole, and allowing the waves to slowly return, beads were made to move outward, thereby forming the familiar circular shape. The radius of the circle depended on such things as: the number of pulses, the amplitude of the pulses, the separation between the floor and the ceiling, the size of the beads and the geometry of the cell. An important feature of the cell was an air buffer around the perimeter of the cell to allow the fluid a place to move, since the fluid itself is non-compressible, the air gap acted as a pneumatic spring. Another important feature was the space between the floor and ceiling. It was important to maintain a small gap (<500 um) between the floor and the ceiling to keep the velocity of the fluid in the cell high enough to move the particles. - Other experiments relating to the general behavior of fluidic-induced particle movement include placing cylindrical beads on the bottom of a an open vessel such as a beaker, then moving the beads by introducing the tip of a syringe into the pile of beads and blowing the liquid out through the tip. In this experiment, the beads all moved radially away from the tip, leaving behind a region void of all beads. Again, it was observed that the beads tended to generally align parallel to the wave front.
FIG. 11 shows a schematic of a concept that uses two such flow-generating tips. The flow from the tips can be operated such that they oppose each other, thus acting to push the beads into the region half way between the tips. Or they can be operated in a push-pull fashion whereby the beads tend to move toward one tip or the other. A synthetic circular force field can be generated by rotating the plate while operating the tips in either of the previously mentioned methods. - An of the invention involves combining the ability to transport beads across the floor of a substrate using either continuous fluid flow or a type of asymmetric oscillatory flow, with the technology for trapping beads, such as the previously described groove plate. This would enable a highly efficient assembly of beads with precise orientations in the smallest possible area. With respect to reduced operating cost and high throughput, all three of these attributes are important elements of a commercial encoded particle reader.
FIG. 70 shows a schematic of a concept that incorporates a closed liquid cell and the elements required to load the cell efficiently. Key elements of the method include: a closed cell including a top and a bottom, the bottom contains a plate with grooves for aligning beads, both the top and the bottom are transparent, the top has an opening in the center for loading beads and for coupling a pressure generating device such as a bellows or a tube, and finally a region of trapped air around the perimeter adjacent to and in contact with the fluid in the cell. The loading operation consists of: filling the cell with a liquid such as water, spinning the cell to remove the air bubbles, dispensing beads through the center hole in the lid, applying a pulsating flow such that the rate of the outward going pulse is higher the return pulse. This will tend to move the pile of beads away from the center of the cell. As the beads move outward they populate the grooves. The direction of the pulsation can be reversed to move the pile of beads back toward the center to enhance the probability that the grooves are fully populated before allowing beads to move out to a larger radius. By moving the beads in and out it should be possible to fully populate the inner most grooves, thus maximizing the overall loading density. It may further be desirable to include an azimuthal (or circumferential) agitation or vibration to stimulate the beads to move along the channels of the grooves once they have fallen in, thereby enhancing the probability that an open space is created to allow room for additional beads to fall into the groove. - Also see
FIGS. 77-79 for “puffing” (pressure pulses) done with straight grooves with the actuator on one end. - Referring to
FIG. 80-81 , the beads may be unloaded by flushing with fluid as shown and discussed herein before. - Alternatively, referring to
FIGS. 62-65 , the groove plate may be cylindrical shaped. In that case, thegrooves 205 may run along the longitudinal axis as shown inFIGS. 62,63 or circumferentially as shown inFIGS. 64,65 . Thegrooves 205 may be oriented in any other direction along the cylindrical groove if desired. Also, thegrooves 205 may be located on the outside of the cylinder as shown inFIGS. 62,64 . Alternatively, thegrooves 205 may be located on the inside of the cylinder as shown inFIGS. 63,65 . When thegrooves 205 are located on the inside, the cylinder may be spun about the longitudinal axis to locate thebeads 8 within thegrooves 205. The orientation of the longitudinal axis of the cylinder may be such that the longitudinal axis is vertical or horizontal or at any other desired angle. - Referring to
FIG. 89 , an apparatus for transporting microbeads for the present invention includes a container or well 400 with a sealedlid 410 havingmicrobeads 8 and liquid 412 therein and asecond container 402 having a sealedlid 411 withliquid 412 therein. Twotubes lid 410, thefirst tube 406 connects thefirst container 400 to apump 416 and thesecond tube 408 connects the first container to thesecond container 402 for receiving the beads from thefirst container 200. Thefirst container 400 is filled with a liquid 412, and one end or tip 414 of thefirst tube 406 is in the liquid 412 a predetermined distance into thecontainer 400, e.g., 20% to 50% of the full depth of the container. Atip 409 of thetube 408 is mounted substantially flush with the bottom surface of thelid 410. Thepump 416 pumps liquid 412 from areservoir 405 into thetube 406 to thefirst container 400. When thepump 416 pumps the liquid 412 into thecontainer 400, thebeads 8 are agitated as indicated by thelines 418. The liquid 412 and thebeads 8 exit thecontainer 400 through thetube 408 as indicated by aline 420 and are emptied into thecontainer 402. The liquid 412 enters thecontainer 402 and exits thecontainer 402 through afilter 424 then through atube 428, as indicated by aline 426. Thefilter 424 prevents thebeads 8 from exiting thecontainer 402. The liquid 412 that exits thecontainer 402 is dispensed via thetube 428 into a waste pan orcontainer 430. - Instead of the
pump 416 being connected to thetube 406, avacuum pump 432 may draw a vacuum on thetube 428. In that case thetube 406 would be open ended. We have found that this technique transports all thebeads 8 from thecontainer 400 to thesecond container 402. - The
tip 409 of thetube 408 may be placed further into the container (i.e., not flush with inner surface of the lid 410), if desired. In that case, some air may be pumped along thetube 408 with the liquid and thebeads 8. If air exists at the top of thecontainer 400, thebeads 8 may stick to the wall or inner surface of thelid 410 and not be transported to theother container 402. - Referring to
FIG. 90 , instead of thesecond container 402 being a sealed container, it may be an open container. In that case, thecontainer 402 should have sufficient volume to receive the fluid from thepump 416. - Referring to
FIGS. 90 and 91 , instead of having thefilter 424 on the exit port of the sealedcontainer 402, the container may have a volume that is large enough such that when thebeads 8 enter from thetube 408, they stay substantially near the bottom of thecontainer 402 and do not get sucked out of thetube 428 to thewaste container 430. This technique for transporting thebeads 8 may be referred to as the “telegraph” technique. - The seal between the
lids containers - We have found that a flow rate of 1.0 to 2.0 ml/sec., with a tube inner diameter of 0.031 to 0.063 inches, and a total transport time of about 0.73 seconds will transport all the beads from a well of a 96 well plate to a bead reader cell, such as that described in copending U.S. patent application Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0082 PR). In that case, the
first container 400 would be an individual well in the well plate, and thesecond container 402 would be the reader cell. - Also, this can be automated such that the
lid 410 is a probe head which comes down on top of the well to create a seal on the well. The probe would contain the twotubes tube 406 would be an aspirate tube and thetube 408 would be a dispense tube for dispensing or transporting thebeads 8 from thefirst container 400 to thesecond container 402. As discussed herein, the system can operate under pressure or a vacuum. For a system operating under pressure, the liquid 412 is driven into the dispense line, pressurizing the well and sending the fluid out of theaspirate tube 408. This permits use of drive pressure greater than 1 atm. However, there is a risk that fluid (and possibly beads) will leak out of the well if the lid seal fails. In a vacuum configuration, theaspirate tube 408 is connected to negative pressure, and drive pressure is limited to 1 atmosphere. However, in that case, if a seal fails, air leaks into the system instead of liquid (and possibly beads) leaking out. - Referring to
FIG. 92 , a similar configuration to that shown inFIG. 91 , using a syringe pump. - Referring to
FIGS. 93-97 , various alternative configurations for pulling or pushing thebeads 8 out of a well 440 having a sealedlid 446, through atube 442, to a largerdiameter holding area 440, using asyringe pump 448. In each case, once thebeads 8 are in the holdingarea 440, thelid 446 is removed from thecontainer 440 and placed in the target or destination well or container (not shown). - In particular, two tips penetrate the upper seal on the container as discussed hereinbefore, with one tip connected to a syringe pump and the other connected to a reservoir. When the syringe pump is aspirated, fluid will be pulled from the reservoir through the second tip. The fluid is thus dispensed from the second tip, agitating the slurry, and aspirated by the first tip. In this way, an arbitrary volume of fluid can be dispensed and aspirated using only a single pump, without overflowing the well or prematurely emptying the well of fluid. The dispensing head is then moved to the new location desired. To dispense the beads, flow is reversed. The flow rate is set lower to avoid re-aspirating the beads into the reservoir. Also, in general, the volume can be set much lower to simply dispense the beads into a new well. The volume can be set the same, however, to refill the reservoir to the original volume. Alternatively, the actuation direction can be reversed. The second tip can be connected to a pump, while the first tip is connected to the reservoir. When fluid is dispensed under pressure through the second tip, fluid will flow up through the first tip, providing an effective aspiration. Re-dispense then involves aspiration through the second tip.
- Referring to
FIG. 98 , a fluidic circuit for loadingbeads 8 fromwells 400 in a known multi-well plate (e.g., a 96 well plate having 8 rows and 12 columns) to a multi-segmented bead cell/chamber, such as is discussed in copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0082 PR) and copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0086 PR) is shown. This system uses an air pump to create a vacuum to pull the beads into the cell 402 (second container) from the wells 400 (first container). - In particular, source fluid is contained in reagent bottles. A bottle is selected by opening the valve which leads by a tubing connection through the bottle cap to the desired bottle. Three bottles are shown, actuated by valves V1, V2 and V3. Additional bottles could be added, each with a companion valve. All valves are electrically operated solenoid valves, such as clean valves sold by Takasago Corp. Valve V6 is ideally a tubing pinch type valve for reliability as beads may damage a conventional solenoid valve.
- The prime mover in this embodiment is an air pump, such as that made by Boxer Corp., which creates a vacuum condition in a pressure vessel that acts as a vacuum trap. Fluid is then pulled into this container when valve V6 is open.
- Alternatively, a liquid pump can serve as the prime mover. In this case, a filter should be placed in front of the pump to block beads from entering the pump. If a liquid pump is used, the pressure vessel is unnecessary as an unsealed waste container can be used. Alternatively, a syringe pump, such as that sold by Kloehn Inc., can serve as the prime mover (as shown in
FIG. 94 ). In this case, a filter should be placed in front of the syringe pump to block beads from entering the syringe. A three way valve must be used with the syringe pump so that after filling the syringe, fluid the valve can be switched to then dump fluid to waste. If a syringe pump is used, the pressure vessel is unnecessary as an unsealed waste container can be used. - Referring to the valve state table shown as Table 1 below, to describe the process of filling the cell, begin with a null state of all valves closed and the pump off. The pump is turned on to stabilize a vacuum condition in the pressure vessel. One of valves V1, V2 or V3 is opened. Valve V4 is opened to direct fluid into the cell. Valve V6 is opened, thereby pulling fluid from the reagent bottles, through the cell and into the pressure vessel. Valve V6 controls the fill cycle time and is held open for a specified length of time, e.g., 1 second, calibrated to pull the desired volume of fluid through the cell.
- A bubble sensor, such as that made by Introtek, may be used to aid in filling the cell with fluid, by ensuring that the fluid line is free of air before ending the fill cycle. The bubble sensor may also be used to detect if air is being pulled into the cell or system by an improperly seated
lid 410 or other air leak. An optional bubble sensor may also be used near the reagent bottles to detect when one of the reagent bottles are empty. Alternatively, a level sensor, such as that made by The Madison Company, in each reagent bottle may be used instead of the bubble sensor to detect empty bottles. Also, another level sensor may be used to in the waste container to detect a full containter. - Continuing the cycle, with the pump on, valve V6 closed and V4 open, to move beads from the well plate into the cell, valve V4 is closed and either valve V5 or valve V7 is opened. Valve V7 is only used if the single well to 8 output divider is intended to be used. Valve V6 is opened, thereby pulling fluid from the reagent bottles, into the sealed well plate, out the well plate into the cell, pushing fluid out of the cell into the pressure vessel. Beads are pulled along with the fluid from the well plate into the cell. While excess fluid exits the cell, the beads remain due to the manifold design within the cell.
- To flush beads from the cell, the process of filling the cell is repeated. Cycle time is set longer, e.g., 2 to 5 seconds, for flush than for filling the cell, as several volume changes are desired to clean fluid and beads from the cell. As the flush volume is several times greater than the volume held within the cell, and the fluid velocity is high, the beads are propelled out of the cell, pass through valve V6 and enter the pressure vessel. A filter in the pressure vessel can be used to capture the beads. Standard household or industrial water filter housing makes an excellent pressure vessel, as does bag filter housing, such as the Giant Bag Housings by MetPro Corporation, Keystone Filter Division.
TABLE 1 Valve Number V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 Fill Cell With Fluid OPEN OFF OFF OPEN OFF OPEN OFF Transfer Beads from 1 OFF OPEN OFF OFF OPEN OPEN OFF Well to 1 Sector in Cell Transfer Beads from 1 OFF OPEN OFF OFF OFF OPEN OPEN Well to 8 Sectors in Cell Load Beads OFF OFF OFF OFF OPEN OFF OFF Flush Reagent # 1OPEN OFF OFF OPEN OFF OPEN OFF Flush Reagent # 2OFF OPEN OFF OPEN OFF OPEN OFF Flush Reagent # 3OFF OFF OPEN OPEN OFF OPEN OFF
In Table 1, Off = fluid flow is blocked; Open = valve passes fluid flow.
- Referring to
FIG. 99 , an alternative fluidic circuit for loadingbeads 8 fromwells 400 in a known multi-well plate (e.g., a 96 well plate having 8 rows and 12 columns) to a multi-segmented bead cell/chamber is shown. The bead cell is similar to that described in copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0082 PR) and/or copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0086 PR). This system uses an air pump to create a vacuum to pull the beads into the cell 402 (second container) from the wells 400 (first container). This system also uses a 3-way valve to route the various fluids into thecell 402 or into thewells 400. - Referring to
FIG. 100 , an alternative fluidic circuit for loadingbeads 8 fromwells 400 in a known multi-well plate (e.g., a 96 well plate having 8 rows and 12 columns) to a multi-segmented bead cell/chamber 402 is shown. The bead cell is similar to that described in copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0082 PR) and/or copending U.S. patent applications Ser. No. (CyVera Docket No. CV-0086 PR). This system uses an air pump to create a vacuum to pull the beads into the cell 402 (second container) from the wells 400 (first container). This system also uses a cell having a filter or frit as described in the aforementioned patent application to help collect the beads at the entry of the cell prior to distributing the beads across the cell for reading. - Referring to
FIGS. 101-102 , an example of an O-ring sealedlid 410 that fits on top of the well (or first container) 400 that would contain thebeads 8.FIG. 102 shows a head having eightlids 410, one for each well of an eight row well plate and thetubes - Referring to
FIG. 110 , a cross-section of a head having 8lids 410, engaged with eight wells, and also showing a housing and springs and thetubes - Referring to
FIG. 103 , a fluidic circuit for loadingbeads 8 fromwells 400 in a known multi-well plate (e.g., a 96 well plate having 8 rows and 12 columns) to a multi-segmented bead cell/chamber 402, similar to that described herein withFIGS. 98 and 99 , except that this system uses a pipetting technique instead of a “telegraph” technique for moving the beads. In that case, the pipette is placed in a well 400 and beads are extracted into the pipette tip. Then the pipette tip is moved and inserted into a pipette port on thecell 402. Also, this embodiment uses a 3-way valve for flow management. - Referring to
FIGS. 108-109 , instead of moving beads from one well to one of the sectored cells in thecell 402, a 1 to 8 flow manifold may be used to distribute beads from one well to eight separated sectors in the cell.FIG. 109 (a) is a perspective view andFIG. 109 (b) is a side cross-section view of the 1 to 8 fluid manifold. This 1 to 8 manifold is also shown as one option in the fluidics schematic ifFIG. 98 . The 1 to 8 manifold may be used to move fluid (with or without beads) from one well or port to 8 wells or port or used in as an 8 to 1 manifold to move fluid (with our without beads) from 8 wells or ports to 1 well or port. - Referring to
FIGS. 104-106 , one technique for pipetting a predetermined number of thebeads 8 from a well 462 is as follows: - 1. Start with a highly accurate estimate of the total number of
beads 8 in a large population in a separate container (not shown). This can be done by aspirating a certain volume ofbeads 8 and knowing the packing density is around 40%. N=volume of beads (ul)×40%/volume per bead (ul/bead). - 2. Dispense the
beads 8 into a known volume of buffer solution, e.g., SSC, SDS, or any other buffer solution or desired fluid in a vial or well 462. - 3. Calculate the concentration of the
beads 8. - 4. Agitate the mixture of the
beads 8 in thevial 462 by repeatably and rapidly cycling thepipette 464 in thebuffer solution 462, thereby causing thebeads 8 to mix and suspend substantially “homogeneously” in thesolution 462. The agitation volume should be about 2-10% of the total volume and the rate of agitation should be fast enough to suspend the beads in solution. Also, it was found that in order to generate good fluid currents and, thus, good bead mixing/suspension, the pipette tip should be placed away from the center of the well 460, and near to the side wall if possible. Note that the pipette tip should be inserted into the liquid 462 such that the pipette tip is near the top of the liquid when the fluid is fully aspirated. Therefore, as the liquid level decreases from successive aspirations, the tip will need to be placed deeper into the vial each time a new group of beads is removed. Also, the size of the opening in the pipette tip opening/orifice determines the velocity of the mixing currents for a given agitation volume and rate. For example, a larger orifice will result in lower velocities for the same rate and volume. We have found that a tip with a small orifice (<about 600 um) works well for the 28×250 micron beads, solution and volume used. However, the tip orifice should not be so small (<about 300 um) that the flow through the tip for the pressure generated and decreased to the point where the velocities are too low to generate good mixing and suspension of the beads. - 5. When the
beads 8 are substantially “homogeneously” mixed and suspended in the liquid, then the next (final) aspiration ofbeads 8 should determine how many of thebeads 8 are drawn from thevial 460. The number ofbeads 8 drawn=concentration (beads/ul)×aspiration volume (ul). - 6. Dispensing the
beads 8 into the target well 468 should include a brief time delay of about 1-3 sec to allow thebeads 8 to fall to the bottom of the pipette tip before they are completely dispensed into the target well 468. - In particular, referring to
FIG. 104 , for example, starting with thevial 460 with about 1000 beads having a diameter of about 28 microns and a length of about 250 microns, in about 1000 microliters of knownbuffer solution 462, e.g., SCC,SDS. First insert apipette tip 464 into the liquid 462 such that the pipette tip is near the top of the liquid when the fluid is fully aspirated. Then, holding the pipette tip substantially still, aspirate/dispense about 4 times with about 150 microliters over a period of about 4 seconds; however other times may be used provided sufficient bead mixing and suspension is achieved. Then, draw a final aspiration of about 50 microliters. Then, transfer the pipette to a target well 468 and wait about 1-3 seconds to allow the beads to settle to the end of the pipette tip, then dispense thebeads 8 into thewell 468. The size of the opening in the pipette tip was 400 microns (0.4 mm) and the size of the well 460 was about 1000 micron liters, and the pipette tip was placed about mid way between the center of the well 460 and the side wall. - Referring to
FIG. 105 , a picture of a Hamilton Syringe Pump syringe pump used to pipette beads with the present invention is shown. The pump having a storage buffer of 1×SSC, 0.1% SDS, and using 200 microliter ultrafine points (VWR) pipette tips. - Referring to
FIG. 106 , a graph of syringe pump bead pipetting results is shown using the process described herein. For 36 tests, the average number of beads removed each time was 18, with a bead diameter of about 28 microns and length of 250 microns, agitation volume of 150 microliters, final aspiration volume of 27 microliters, and a starting bead concentration of 0.68 beads per microliter. - Referring to
FIG. 107 , a diagram of how a kitting process may be performed with the present invention. A plurality of containers or wells 500-504 are provided, each well having beads with a specific code. For example, the well 500 hasbeads 8 with a code of 345, as shown by thedigital representation image 506, the well 502 hasbeads 8 having the code of 8197, as shown by thedigital representation image 508, and the well 504 hasbeads 8 having the code of 15606, as shown by thedigital representation image 510. The plurality of wells 500-504 having thebeads 8 can createMultiplex Bead Kits 1 through N, each Kit in a separate container 516-520, and each Kit having a predetermined number of any one or more of the codes in the wells 500-504. Thebeads 8 may be transported from the wells 500-504 using the any embodiment of the present invention or using any technique now known or later developed to move a predetermined number thebeads 8 into the containers 516-520 for the Kits. The predetermined number ofbeads 8 of each code in each kit may have a tolerance, e.g., +/−10 beads. Other bead kit tolerances may be used depending on the application. Referring toFIGS. 111-114 , a method for making a “kit” consisting of N unique codes, where N may range from 1 to 5000, represented by M replicates (beads), where M may range from 5-100, can be accomplished by a two step process, consisting of transferring a small number (M) of beads from a vial or well containing beads of all the same code to a target well or vial, then, combining the small number of beads representing each code in the kit to a single vial or well, thus forming the “kit”. The first step, transferring M beads from the source, could be performed in a 48,96 or 384 well format using the pipetting approach previously described, or from an arbitrary configuration of individual vials. It is recognized that this can be done in parallel with a conventional multi-head pipetting machine such as those found in many laboratories. The second step of combining individual sets of N codes together to form the final “kit” may be accomplished by either dispensing the individual sets into a funnel-like device where the beads are flushed into a single well or vial containing a filter bottom such that copious amounts of fluid may be used to sufficiently flush all the beads through the funnel, leaving substantially no beads behind. Another approach, which accomplishes the combining effect, is to “telegraph” (previously described) the beads representing individual codes into a single vial or well all at once. This process is very fast and highly efficient in terms of transferring all the beads from the source to the destination. This two-step process would enable “kits” to be made with an arbitrary number of codes and represented by an arbitrary number of beads per code, in a rapid and efficient manner. - Referring to
FIG. 115 shows a perspective view of the 8 sector bead cell having 8input tubes 408 which transport beads and fluid from 8 cells to 8 corresponding sectors of the bead cell. It also shows a 1 to 8 flow manifold which takes in fluid and distributes it to 8 sectors in the cell. - In particular,
FIG. 111 shows a multi-well plate having beads which are pipetted individually to another multi-well plate which are then telegraphed as a group of wells (as described herein) to a filter well Kit container.FIG. 112 shows a multi-well plate having beads which are pipetted as a predetermined group or individual pipette tips to another multi-well plate, which are then telegraphed as a group of wells (as described herein) to a filter well Kit container.FIG. 113 shows an 8 to 1 manifold for receiving 8 pipette tips which will simultaneously dispense fluid and beads into the manifold and the manifold combines the received fluid and beads to a single output port which dispenses the fluid and beads into the Kit container having a filter on the bottom to catch the beads. The beads are then transferred to a final kitting container.FIG. 114 shows a pipetting machine having a flush port for flushing fluid through the pipette tip, which can be used after thebeads 8 are dispensed into the manifold shown inFIG. 113 , or whenever flushing with a fluid is needed. In each of the above cases, the Kit container may have a filter on the bottom to catch the beads and allow the fluid to exit. The beads are then transferred to a final kitting container. Alternatively, the container may be large enough to hold the fluid and the beads and then the beads and a portion of the fluid may be transported (e.g., by the telegraph method described herein) to a smaller kit container if needed. -
FIGS. 118-133 show an alternative embodiment of the present invention. In summary,FIGS. 118-121 show the basic achitecture and governing design principles;FIGS. 122 a to 125 show steps of the overall method and the sequencing thereof;FIG. 126 shows details related to a groove plate design;FIGS. 127 a-d show basic experiments; andFIGS. 128-133 show more detailed diagrams of components of the basic architecture. - Consistent with that discussed above, the microbead platform will perform biological assays on beads by attaching a type of biomolecule to the beads then placing the beads in a vessel containing sample material, which will react in varying degrees to the biomolecules. The extent to which the sample reacts is determined by measuring the intensity of a fluorescent tag molecule, and the indentity of the fluorescent beads is determined by reading its holographic code. Both fluorescence and code detection methods place requirements on how beads are oriented relative to the interrogation lasers and collection optics. The purpose of the fluidic sub-system is to manage all fluid and bead manipulation activities entailed in the interrogation process. These include movement of beads from the microtiter plate to the cell, alignment of beads in the cell and finally removal of beads from the cell so that the next batch can be interrogated. The fluidic system must also provide a means by which it can be cleaned of all biological and chemical contamination.
- The following 6 steps describe the basic functions of the reader from a fluidic point of view:
-
- 1) Prime Cell
- 2) Transfer Beads
- 3) Load beads into grooves
- 4) Scan beads
- 5) Flush
- 6) Clean cell (after N cycles)
- Steps 2-5 are performed every cycle on 8 wells at a time on an 8×12 well plate. Therefore a full 96 well plate requires 12 cycles to complete.
Step 1 is performed on start up and whenever the fluidic system either accumulates too much air or to remove persistent beads from grooves. Likewise,step 6 is performed when an unacceptable level of fluorescent contamination has accumulated. -
FIG. 119 shows the governing design principles. -
FIG. 120 shows a diagram of the fluidic system process flow including the 6 basic steps. -
FIG. 121 shows the fluidic system including the architecture generally indicated as 1000 and major subsystems, including a transfer tube orprobe assembly 1012, awell plate 1012, a cell orcell assembly 1008, a puffer tube orpuffer tube assembly 1006 andsyringe pump 1001, consistent with that shown in detail below inFIG. 118 . -
FIG. 118 shows in detail the basic fluidics architecture generally indicated as 1000 for performing the 6 steps of the alternative embodiment of the present invention, and includes the following elements and functionality as set forth below: - The
Syringe pump 1001 aspirates or dispenses from selected valve position. - The
Rotary valve 1002 rotates to select from 5 positions—Output to cell,Reagent 1,Reagent 2,Reagent 3, Dispense Excess/Aspirate Air. - The Tube Assembly, Output to
Cell 1003 is fluoropolymer tubing to allow fluid to flow fromsyringe 1001 to the manifold leading tocell chimney 1007. - The Manifold (1×8) 1004 divides flow from 1 input line to 8 output lines leading to cell.
- Check valves 1005: Check valves are connected to each of the 8 lines in the manifold. The check valves prevent fluid from siphoning between lanes of the cell. Without the check valves, a small height imbalance of the fluid in one probe versus another, could cause the siphoning of fluid out of the line carrying the shorter fluid path. This could then lead to a chain reaction where all the fluid siphons out of the cell.
- Puffer tube assemblies 1006: The puffer tubes are constructed of silicone tubing with
inner diameter 3/16 inch andouter diameter 5/16 inch. Compression of the tubing with the puffer block displaces fluid. The check valves prevent fluid from flowing back to the pump. Also, even without the check valves, the syringe is a stiff system which would prevent flow in this direction. Therefore all flow from compression moves out through the cell and out the probes. Release of the tubing then aspirates fluid through the probes back into the cell. The silicone tubes were selected for their elasticity and low compression set. - The
Chimney 1007—Thechimney 1007 is a molded part that is critical to the transfer of beads into the cell and loading of beads into grooves. Thechimney 1007 terminates in the cell in a narrow line shaped nozzle which we call the line port. This shape provides a relatively flat flow velocity profile across the width of the alley. The narrowness of the port (generally less than 2 bead lengths at the narrowest portion), prevents large slow moving eddy regions when beads turn the corner from chimney to cell. Also, the spacer is aligned with the back of the nozzle to prevent significant dead zones of flow. Bead loading into grooves takes place at flow velocities that are in the laminar regime away from the immediate vicinity of the grooves. Thechimney 1007 expands into a wider region. The height of the chimney and width of the expanded region were designed to limit the height to which beads rise in the chimney during transfer. By limiting this height, beads are not aspirated out of the chimney, which would lead to cross-contamination in later cycles. - Cell Assembly is labelled 1008.
- Top Plate 1008 a: The top plate is the top optical window of the cell sandwich. It contains a row of 8 holes for attachment of the chimney to the 8 lanes of the cell. At the opposite end of the alleys, it contains a row of 8 holes for attachment of the bead ports.
- Spacer 1008 b—The spacer maintains a gap between the groove plate and top window. It also seals and separates the 8 alleys from each other and from the outside world. The spacer is made of a silicone gasket. The gasket is attached to the two glass plates under compression and heat to create a seal. The spacer thickness is 0.015 inch or 380 microns. This thickness appears to be near an optimum value for balancing competing needs. On one hand, the thinner the gap the higher the velocity near the grooves, this aids in bead loading with the puffer and in bead removal. On the other hand, if the gap is too small, bubbles are not effectively cleared from the cell. Note that other materials could serve as a gasket.
- Groove Plate 1008 c—the groove plate arranges the beads in an orderly fashion to be read by the reader optics. The groove plate is made of fused silica and is produced by an RIE (reactive ion etch) process. Fused silica is used for its low fluorescence, permitting better sensitivity to low fluorescence signals. Several other processes have been explored for constructing a groove plate.
- Bead Entrance/
Exit Ports 1009—The bead tubes from the probes terminate in this port. The gasket taper to a rounded cone, with the port at the apex. The goal is to minimize dead volume, so that beads maintain momentum as they enter and exit the cell through the port. Each alley has a fluidically isolated port. - Bead Tubes,
fluoropolymer 1010—The bead tubes carry beads into the cell through the transfer process, and carry them out of the cell during the flush process. Fluoropolymer tubing is used for inertness, to minimize friction and reduce bubble adhesion. -
Probe Assemblies 1011—The probes are connected and integral with the bead tubes. The probes enter the well plate for transferring beads into the cell. The probes are designed to withstand “bottoming out” in the well plate and are spring loaded. - Well
Plate 1012 -
Water Tube Assembly 1013 -
- Tube Assembly, External, Water 1013 a
-
Buffer Tube Assembly 1014 -
- Tube Assembly, External, Buffer 1014 a
-
Alcohol Tube Assembly 1015 -
- Tube Assembly, External, Alcohol 1015 a
- Air & Fluid
Excess Tube Assembly 1016 - Tee 1016 a
- Air Inlet to Valve Check Valve 1016 b-On syringe aspirate from this valve position, allows air to enter the syringe. The check valve blocks flow in the dispense direction
- Air Inlet to Valve Check Valve 1016 c—This check valve allows flow in the dispense direction to waste, but blocks return flow, to prevent aspiration from waste.
- Waste
Drain Tube Assembly 1017 -
- Tube Assembly, External, Waste Drain 1017 a
-
Panel Connections 1018—Field connections for the customer. Luer locks are preferred. -
Reagent Bottles 1019 - Bottle Caps 1019 a
- Tube Connections 1019 b
- Straws 1019 c
- Filters 1019 d
-
Level Switches 1020—Sense reagent bottles empty below a set point or waste bottle full over a maximum level. -
Waste Bottle 1021 - Waste/
Wash Tray 1022—Divided into two sections—one for dumping waste fluid and beads, and a section for washing the probe tips. Spillage from the wash overflows into waste. Fluid may be pumped using the auxiliary pump into the wash section to augment cleaning and to add bleach. -
Wash subsystem 1023 - Auxiliary pump 1023 a
- Check Valve 1023 b-Prevents back pressure on the auxiliary pump.
- A rotary valve selects among reagent and waste bottles, or output to the cell. The syringe pump aspirates or dispenses to the selected valve.
- Either by hand or using laboratory automation, the user places a 96 well micro-titre plate on the platform.
- An actuator moves the platform with the plate into position.
- Transfer beads into cell
-
- a) Probe assemblies descend to near top of well
- b) Slow compression of the puffer tubing to displace fluid into the wells
- c) Probe assemblies move to bottom of well
- d) Rapid release of puffer tubing to draw fluid and beads into the bead tubes
-
FIG. 119 sets forth the the governing design principles. - The 6 steps are described in detail, as follows:
-
FIGS. 122 a-e show the basic sequence of the prime cell step. - The purpose of the Prime Cell step is to configure the cell and its associated fluidic components in a state that allows effective transfer of beads from the
well plate 1012 to the cell. Such a state is characterized by having the entire fluidic system, from the syringe pump to the probe tips filled with a buffer solution and having substantially all the air removed from the fluidic system, including both small air bubbles and larger cavities. Once in this state, the fluidic system is considered “stiff” from a fluidic point of view, and is capable of supporting bead transfer, bead loading and bead flushing operations. - The following sequence, which relies on a syringe pump as the motive for fluids through the system, is designed to prime the cell:
- Displace fluid in system with air,
- Displace Air with Ethanol,
- Displace Ethanol with Water, and
- Displace Water with Buffer.
- Each of the four basic elements of the prime cycle has a specific purpose, as does the order of operations. The importance of the first step, pushing air through the system to displace any fluid that may already be in the system, was found to help with the second step, ethanol purge; though it is still unclear why it helps. Ethanol is the first fluid pushed through the system after purging with air. Ethanol has a very low surface tension and is a good wetting agent; properties that make it ideal for removing bubbles throughout the system, especially in the cell where bubbles trapped in the small cross-section device are most difficult to remove. Once the interior surfaces of the fluidic system are wetted with ethanol and the air bubbles are removed, water is pushed through. Although the ethanol is highly effective at removing air bubbles, the one source of trapped air ethanol cannot remove resides in the chimney. The pocket of air trapped in the chimney is a consequence of pushing fluid down the chimney rather than up the chimney. The natural tendency of the air in the chimney is to rise since it is less dense than all the fluids. When ethanol is pushed through, it simply spills around the air pocket as it travels from the top of the chimney to the bottom on its way to the cell. The spilling effect, a result of very low surface tension, prevents the air from being displaced by the liquid. To overcome this, water is pushed through the system next. Because the ethanol wets all surfaces the water can come through next and wet the surfaces by simply displacing the ethanol rather than trying the wet dry surfaces directly. Once the water displaces the ethanol, its high surface tension allows it to form a meniscus at the top of the chimney, which follows the shape of the chimney as it travel from the inlet at the top of the chimney to the cell at the bottom. Provided the inside diameter of the chimney never exceeds a critical diameter (approximately 9 mm for a round geometry and less for shapes that deviate from round), it is possible to support a column of water above the air without spilling around the air pocket. As the water is introduced into the chimney by the syringe pump the pocket of air is continuously pushed down toward the bottom of the chimney and eventually out through the cell and finally through the probe tips. In addition to the critical diameter, it is also important that surfaces and transitions inside the chimney be smooth and continuous; asperities will tend to break the meniscus as it travels slowly down the chimney. Once the water is pushed entirely through the system and the cell is free of all air both in the form of bubbles and cavities the sequence proceeds to the final step, which is to simply displace the water with a buffer solution. The system is now considered primed.
-
FIGS. 123 a-e show the basic sequence of the step for transferring ofbeads 8 to the cell or well-plate 1008. - The transfer process refers to the movement of beads from the well-
plate 1012 to thecell 1008 through a path, which includes the transfer tube, the cell and finally the chimney. In most cases, beads begin their journey at the bottom of a round bottom well; since they are denser than the buffer fluid they sink to the bottom of the well. The method of transferring beads from the well plate involves vacuuming them off the bottom of the well with an open-ended tube attached to the cell, called a transfer tube. At the distal end of the transfer tube is the probe tip which has attached to it a cone-shaped vestige designed to enhance the flow rate around beads that are more than a few tube diameters away from the center of the tube, thereby enhancing the efficiency of the transfer process. However, unlike a typical vacuum whereby the flow rate is always in the same direction (i.e. into the vacuum) the method employed here involves alternating the direction of the flow and varying the rate of flow. - Responsibility for this action is a device called a “puffer,” which consists of a flexible silicone tube approximately 2″ long by ¼″ diameter. The tube is connected in-line between the syringe pump and the cell and is placed between two metal surfaces, on of which moves in order to squeezed the tube. Fluid rushes out of the tube when it's squeezed and back in when it's released. Since one end of the tube is dead-ended at the syringe and the other end (the part that goes into the well with the beads) is open, the net flow is always through the open end, both inward and outward.
- Beads are transported from the well-plate to the cell by repeating a cycle of slow contractions and fast expansions of the puffer tube. Slow contractions re-set the puffer tube to a state whereby a vacuum can be applied to the transfer tube (expansion), thereby pulling beads toward the cell. While the flow rate is slow liquid moves past the beads without carrying them very far in the direction of the flow. While the flow is rapid, beads are effectively moved in the direction of the flow. Therefore, repeating the cycle causes the beads to acquire a net motion in the direction of the fast flow. This method is employed to lift beads out of the well plate and transport them to the cell during the transfer process and move beads out on the groove plate during the load process and remove beads from the grooves and flush them out of the cell during the flush process.
- Another key element of the fluidic architecture with regard to the transfer process is the chimney. The chimney is made to have a rapidly increasing inner diameter starting from the point at which it is attached to the cell. The purpose of the large inner diameter is to decrease the flow rate to the extent that beads cannot travel past the chimney and become lost in tubing. The inner volume of the chimney is designed to be 2 to 5 times larger than the volume of fluid displaced by the puffer during the transfer process. It was found that beads entering the chimney at high rates of speed travel about ¾ the height of the chimney before the flow is reversed (slow contraction) which then pushes the beads to the bottom of the chimney and even out onto the groove plate. After a certain number of puffer cycles (10-15), the puffer stops and beads fall under their own weight to the bottom of the chimney and pile up in small rectangular opening called the line port. The distribution of beads in the port is uniform across the opening, which is important for the next step; bead load.
- Beads are considered transferred after a set number of (empirically determined) puffer cycles. Once the beads are transferred excess cycles cause them to harmlessly rise and fall in the chimney. Therefore, without a means of feedback, the transfer process is always run with an excess number of cycles to ensure that a high percentage of beads are transferred. Efficiencies that range between 95 and 99.9% are obtained after about 15 cycles, approximately 40 seconds. The proc0ess concludes with beads settling to the bottom of the chimney on the groove plate in a pile substantially uniform in distribution within the port, a consequence of randomization caused by turbulent flow in the chimney.
- The port, which is defined as the opening of the chimney to the cell, is rectangular in shape, approximately 6 mm long and 250 μm wide. It is surrounded on three edges by the gasket, which forms the perimeter of each of the 8 independent lanes. The fourth edge is open to the lane leading to the grooved region. The back edge of the port is aligned as closely as possible to the edge of the gasket so as to minimize dead zones in the flow field caused by eddy currents. Gaps that range from 0 to 50 μm were found to eliminate such dead regions behind the opening of the port where beads could potentially become stuck. Similarly, the width of the port opening is large enough to ensure beads don't form a log jam but small enough ensure the velocity of the flow through any portion of the opening is sufficiently large to carry beads out of the port region during the bead load process. The range of openings found to be effective were 200 to 400 μm. The length of the port opening, which spans nearly the entire 7 mm width of the lane, was found to produce the most uniform distribution of beads in the grooved region of any combination of port and gasket shapes. Other geometries tried involved ports of various sizes of circles with gaskets cut into linear tapers, horn shaped tapers and parabolic shaped taper, which depending on the flow rate, produced either narrow beam-like distributions or lobed distributions characterized by a low density region of beads in the middle of the lane and high density regions near the edges of the lane. Both types of profiles produced unacceptably low total packing densities, a feature that plays heavily into the overall throughput of the instrument. Unlike the circular port shapes that rely on the flow field to produce distribution functions, the rectangular port shape allows the beads to form a uniform distribution across the width of the lane by the simple process of mixing in the chimney then settling to the bottom.
- Another feature of the cell that plays in important roll in the dynamics of bead transport is the thickness of the gasket. The gasket not only defines the perimeter of the lane around the grooved region and the ports, it also defines the height of the column of fluid in the cell. With a density of 2.2 glass beads sink in aqueous solutions, which means when they are in the cell they will lay on the surface of the groove plate (the bottom of the cell), where the velocity of the laminar flow is close to zero. When the height of the laminar flow field (thickness of the gasket) becomes very large compared with the diameter of the bead the velocity of the flow intercepting the bead approaches zero. Therefore, to maximize the interaction of the bead with the flow field the gasket thickness should be kept as thin as possible.
- Countering this requirement are two issues that occur when the gasket is too thin. The first pertains to the persistence of small air bubbles. The smaller the gap between the groove plate and the top plate the harder it becomes to flush small air bubbles away. It was found that a gasket thickness of less than 300 μm resulted in such problems. The second relates to the pressure drop across the cell during the transfer cycle. Because the entire pressure generated by the puffer during transfer drops across both the cell and the transfer tube, since they're in series with each other, the impedance of the cell cannot be much larger than the transfer line. Otherwise the flow rate at the distal end of the transfer tube will be insufficient to cause bead transport out of the well. Therefore it is important to balance the impedance of the transfer tube with the cell. Again, the minimum gasket thickness was found to be around 300 μm.
-
FIGS. 124 a-b show the basic sequence of the step for loading of thebeads 8 into the grooves of the well-plate 1008. - The step for scanning the beads in the well-
plate 1008 is consistent with that described above. -
FIGS. 125 a-b show the basic sequence of the step for flushing thebeads 8 from the grooves of the well-plate 1008. -
FIGS. 126 a and b show the groove plate design. -
FIGS. 127 a-d relate to bead feasibility experiments, includingFIG. 127 a that shows bead alignment feasibility experiments with performance requirements and drivers and the basic parameters of the experiment;FIG. 127 b that shows multiplex ranges;FIG. 127 c that shows bead loss feasibility experiments; andFIG. 127 d that shows bead flush feasibility experiments. -
FIGS. 128-133 show more detailed diagrams of components of thebasic architecture 1001. - Unless otherwise specifically stated herein, the term “microbead” is used herein as a label and does not restrict any embodiment or application of the present invention to certain dimensions, materials and/or geometries.
- The dimensions and/or geometries for any of the embodiments described herein are merely for illustrative purposes and, as such, any other dimensions and/or geometries may be used if desired, depending on the application, size, performance, manufacturing requirements, or other factors, in view of the teachings herein.
- It should be understood that, unless stated otherwise herein, any of the features, characteristics, alternatives or modifications described regarding a particular embodiment herein may also be applied, used, or incorporated with any other embodiment described herein. Also, the drawings herein are not drawn to scale.
- Although the invention has been described and illustrated with respect to exemplary embodiments thereof, the foregoing and various other additions and omissions may be made therein and thereto without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention.
Claims (18)
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US11/226,892 US20100255603A9 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2005-09-13 | Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same |
US12/408,037 US8470605B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2009-03-20 | Optical reader for reading encoded microparticles |
Applications Claiming Priority (9)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US41054102P | 2002-09-12 | 2002-09-12 | |
US64568903A | 2003-08-20 | 2003-08-20 | |
US10/661,836 US7399643B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2003-09-12 | Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same |
US54643504P | 2004-02-19 | 2004-02-19 | |
US60958304P | 2004-09-13 | 2004-09-13 | |
US61091004P | 2004-09-17 | 2004-09-17 | |
US61083304P | 2004-09-17 | 2004-09-17 | |
US11/063,665 US20060160208A1 (en) | 2004-02-19 | 2005-02-22 | Multi-well plate with alignment grooves for encoded microparticles |
US11/226,892 US20100255603A9 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2005-09-13 | Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same |
Related Parent Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/661,836 Continuation-In-Part US7399643B2 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2003-09-12 | Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same |
US11/063,665 Continuation-In-Part US20060160208A1 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2005-02-22 | Multi-well plate with alignment grooves for encoded microparticles |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/408,037 Division US8470605B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2009-03-20 | Optical reader for reading encoded microparticles |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20060063271A1 true US20060063271A1 (en) | 2006-03-23 |
US20100255603A9 US20100255603A9 (en) | 2010-10-07 |
Family
ID=46322633
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/226,892 Abandoned US20100255603A9 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2005-09-13 | Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same |
US12/408,037 Expired - Fee Related US8470605B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2009-03-20 | Optical reader for reading encoded microparticles |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/408,037 Expired - Fee Related US8470605B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2009-03-20 | Optical reader for reading encoded microparticles |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US20100255603A9 (en) |
Cited By (42)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20050220408A1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2005-10-06 | Cyvera Corporation | Optical identification element having non-waveguide photosensitive substrate with diffraction grating therein |
US20050227252A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2005-10-13 | Moon John A | Diffraction grating-based encoded articles for multiplexed experiments |
US20060057729A1 (en) * | 2003-09-12 | 2006-03-16 | Illumina, Inc. | Diffraction grating-based encoded element having a substance disposed thereon |
US20060071075A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2006-04-06 | Moon John A | Optical reader for diffraction grating-based encoded optical identification elements |
US20060072177A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2006-04-06 | Putnam Martin A | Diffraction grating-based encoded microparticle assay stick |
US20060119913A1 (en) * | 2003-08-20 | 2006-06-08 | Illumina, Inc. | Fourier scattering methods for encoding microbeads and methods and apparatus for reading the same |
US20060118630A1 (en) * | 2004-11-16 | 2006-06-08 | Illumina, Inc. | Holographically encoded elements for microarray and other tagging labeling applications, and method and apparatus for making and reading the same |
US20060132877A1 (en) * | 2004-11-17 | 2006-06-22 | Illumina, Inc. | Lithographically fabricated holographic optical identification element |
US20070121181A1 (en) * | 2005-11-22 | 2007-05-31 | Cyvera Corporation | Method and apparatus for labeling using optical identification elements characterized by X-ray diffraction |
US20070148599A1 (en) * | 2005-09-13 | 2007-06-28 | Randall True | Multiple step printing methods for microbarcodes |
US20070236796A1 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2007-10-11 | Illumina, Inc. | Method of manufacturing of a diffraction grating-based optical identification element |
US20070236789A1 (en) * | 2006-04-10 | 2007-10-11 | Moon John A | Optical scanner with improved scan time |
US20090137053A1 (en) * | 2007-05-10 | 2009-05-28 | Sony Corporation | Bead set, production process of the bead set, and method of using the bead set |
US20090194589A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2009-08-06 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical reader system for substrates having an optically readable code |
US7659983B2 (en) | 2003-01-22 | 2010-02-09 | Electronics And Telecommunications Resarch Institute | Hybrid random bead/chip based microarray |
US20100246005A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2010-09-30 | Cyvera Corporation | Encoded particle having a grating with variations in the refractive index |
US20100246007A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2010-09-30 | Illumina Corporation | composition including an item and an encoded optical substrate and a method for identifying an item |
US20100255603A9 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2010-10-07 | Putnam Martin A | Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same |
US20100297448A1 (en) * | 2005-09-13 | 2010-11-25 | True Randall J | Miniaturized microparticles |
US20110057797A1 (en) * | 2009-09-09 | 2011-03-10 | Absolute Software Corporation | Alert for real-time risk of theft or loss |
US7923260B2 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2011-04-12 | Illumina, Inc. | Method of reading encoded particles |
WO2011053845A2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2011-05-05 | Illumina, Inc. | Microvessels, microparticles, and methods of manufacturing and using the same |
JP2013064722A (en) * | 2011-05-13 | 2013-04-11 | Jvc Kenwood Corp | Disk for sample analysis |
EP2689253A2 (en) * | 2011-03-22 | 2014-01-29 | Cyvek, Inc. | Microfluidic devices and methods of manufacture and use |
US9229001B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2016-01-05 | Cyvek, Inc. | Method and apparatus for performing assays |
US9500645B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2016-11-22 | Cyvek, Inc. | Micro-tube particles for microfluidic assays and methods of manufacture |
US9546932B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2017-01-17 | Cyvek, Inc. | Microfluidic assay operating system and methods of use |
US9610597B1 (en) | 2011-10-27 | 2017-04-04 | Copilot Ventures Fund Iii Llc | Methods of delivery of encapsulated perfluorocarbon taggants |
US9651568B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2017-05-16 | Cyvek, Inc. | Methods and systems for epi-fluorescent monitoring and scanning for microfluidic assays |
US9700889B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2017-07-11 | Cyvek, Inc. | Methods and systems for manufacture of microarray assay systems, conducting microfluidic assays, and monitoring and scanning to obtain microfluidic assay results |
US9759718B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2017-09-12 | Cyvek, Inc. | PDMS membrane-confined nucleic acid and antibody/antigen-functionalized microlength tube capture elements, and systems employing them, and methods of their use |
US9855735B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2018-01-02 | Cyvek, Inc. | Portable microfluidic assay devices and methods of manufacture and use |
US10065403B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2018-09-04 | Cyvek, Inc. | Microfluidic assay assemblies and methods of manufacture |
US10228367B2 (en) | 2015-12-01 | 2019-03-12 | ProteinSimple | Segmented multi-use automated assay cartridge |
US10280454B2 (en) | 2011-10-28 | 2019-05-07 | Illumina, Inc. | Microarray fabrication system and method |
US20190265340A1 (en) * | 2018-02-28 | 2019-08-29 | Navico Holding As | Sonar transducer having geometric elements |
US20190310117A1 (en) * | 2013-02-21 | 2019-10-10 | Rowe Technologies, Inc. | Acquatic velocity scanning apparatus and methods |
US10698107B2 (en) | 2010-11-01 | 2020-06-30 | Rowe Technologies, Inc. | Multi frequency 2D phased array transducer |
US11105922B2 (en) | 2018-02-28 | 2021-08-31 | Navico Holding As | Sonar transducer having geometric elements |
US11143758B2 (en) * | 2017-10-13 | 2021-10-12 | Navico Holding As | Sonar transducer performance optimization |
US11219897B2 (en) * | 2015-12-31 | 2022-01-11 | Curiosis Co., Ltd. | Device for separating or aligning fine particles, and method for separating or aligning fine particles using same |
EP4212881A1 (en) * | 2021-12-28 | 2023-07-19 | Sysmex Corporation | Sample measuring method, cartridge, and sample measuring device |
Families Citing this family (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20060134324A1 (en) * | 2004-11-17 | 2006-06-22 | Illumina, Inc. | Filament with easily removed protective coating and methods for stripping the same |
KR100941415B1 (en) * | 2007-10-23 | 2010-02-10 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Liquid barcode and liquid barcode reader |
CN102341693B (en) * | 2009-03-07 | 2013-11-20 | 惠普开发有限公司 | Analyzer and method for sensing using the same |
US9296641B2 (en) | 2012-11-01 | 2016-03-29 | Owens-Brockway Glass Container Inc. | Inspectable black glass containers |
US10543704B2 (en) * | 2012-11-01 | 2020-01-28 | Owens-Brockway Glass Container Inc. | Particle-coded container |
Citations (93)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3074634A (en) * | 1961-04-17 | 1963-01-22 | Ibm | Pattern recognition |
US3791788A (en) * | 1970-06-30 | 1974-02-12 | Monsanto Co | Method for washing a tow |
US3858979A (en) * | 1971-09-29 | 1975-01-07 | Colorant Schmuckstein Gmbh | Method of determining the properties of a jewelery stone and apparatus for this method |
US4011435A (en) * | 1974-02-01 | 1977-03-08 | Ncr Corporation | Optical indicia marking and detection system |
US4647544A (en) * | 1984-06-25 | 1987-03-03 | Nicoli David F | Immunoassay using optical interference detection |
US4725110A (en) * | 1984-08-13 | 1988-02-16 | United Technologies Corporation | Method for impressing gratings within fiber optics |
US4815027A (en) * | 1984-04-13 | 1989-03-21 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Optical operation apparatus for effecting parallel signal processing by detecting light transmitted through a filter in the form of a matrix |
US4816659A (en) * | 1987-10-13 | 1989-03-28 | Control Module Inc. | Bar code reader head |
US4992385A (en) * | 1986-07-24 | 1991-02-12 | Ares-Serono Research And Development Limited Partnership | Polymer-coated optical structures and methods of making and using the same |
US5002867A (en) * | 1988-04-25 | 1991-03-26 | Macevicz Stephen C | Nucleic acid sequence determination by multiple mixed oligonucleotide probes |
US5003600A (en) * | 1989-08-03 | 1991-03-26 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Energy | Diffraction gratings used as identifying markers |
US5081012A (en) * | 1988-03-29 | 1992-01-14 | Applied Research Systems Ars Holding N.V. | Waveguide sensor with input and reflecting gratings and its use in immunoassay |
US5089387A (en) * | 1988-07-07 | 1992-02-18 | Adeza Biomedical Corporation | Dna probe diffraction assay and reagents |
US5090807A (en) * | 1990-01-10 | 1992-02-25 | Environmental Research Institute Of Michigan | Real time optical pre-detection processing of multispectral image data |
US5091636A (en) * | 1988-02-23 | 1992-02-25 | Sony Corporation | Apparatus for detecting modulated informations from emitted light turned by an object |
US5095194A (en) * | 1989-10-12 | 1992-03-10 | Joseph Barbanell | Holographic credit card with automatical authentication and verification |
US5100238A (en) * | 1987-06-11 | 1992-03-31 | Orlon Corporation Limited | Cuvette and apparatus for performing biological assays |
US5192980A (en) * | 1990-06-27 | 1993-03-09 | A. E. Dixon | Apparatus and method for method for spatially- and spectrally-resolved measurements |
US5196350A (en) * | 1991-05-29 | 1993-03-23 | Omnigene, Inc. | Ligand assay using interference modulation |
US5283777A (en) * | 1991-04-26 | 1994-02-01 | Pioneer Electronic Corporation | Three-dimensional optical recording medium and optical information recording apparatus using the same |
US5291027A (en) * | 1992-07-08 | 1994-03-01 | Toppan Printing Co., Ltd. | Optical identification multiple diffraction grating mark member and card using the same |
US5291006A (en) * | 1989-08-11 | 1994-03-01 | Nhk Spring Co., Ltd. | Authenticity identifying system for information storage cards |
US5388173A (en) * | 1993-12-20 | 1995-02-07 | United Technologies Corporation | Method and apparatus for forming aperiodic gratings in optical fibers |
US5394234A (en) * | 1991-12-19 | 1995-02-28 | Control Module Inc. | Method and apparatus for detecting forged diffraction gratings on identification means |
US5395558A (en) * | 1991-12-06 | 1995-03-07 | Johnson & Johnson Vision Products, Inc. | Method of making a soft ophthalmic lens |
US5607188A (en) * | 1994-06-24 | 1997-03-04 | Imation Corp. | Marking of optical disc for customized identification |
US5610287A (en) * | 1993-12-06 | 1997-03-11 | Molecular Tool, Inc. | Method for immobilizing nucleic acid molecules |
US5712912A (en) * | 1995-07-28 | 1998-01-27 | Mytec Technologies Inc. | Method and apparatus for securely handling a personal identification number or cryptographic key using biometric techniques |
US5721435A (en) * | 1996-04-09 | 1998-02-24 | Hewlett Packard Company | Methods and apparatus for measuring optical properties of biological and chemical substances |
US5729365A (en) * | 1996-01-11 | 1998-03-17 | Sandia Corporation | Computer generated holographic microtags |
US5861113A (en) * | 1996-08-01 | 1999-01-19 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of Commerce | Fabrication of embossed diffractive optics with reusable release agent |
US5874187A (en) * | 1996-08-15 | 1999-02-23 | Lucent Technologies Incorporated | Photo recording medium |
US5881197A (en) * | 1997-02-14 | 1999-03-09 | University Of Southampton | Optical fibre and optical fibre device |
US6017754A (en) * | 1995-08-24 | 2000-01-25 | Invitrogen Corporation | System for isolating and identifying eukaryotic cells transfected with genes and vectors, host cells and methods thereof |
US6025283A (en) * | 1995-05-12 | 2000-02-15 | The Real Gold Card Company Limited | Charge card |
US6025129A (en) * | 1995-04-25 | 2000-02-15 | Irori | Remotely programmable matrices with memories and uses thereof |
US6027694A (en) * | 1996-10-17 | 2000-02-22 | Texperts, Inc. | Spillproof microplate assembly |
US6030581A (en) * | 1997-02-28 | 2000-02-29 | Burstein Laboratories | Laboratory in a disk |
US6035082A (en) * | 1998-03-16 | 2000-03-07 | Luna Innovations, Inc. | Process for preparing an optical fiber sensor with enhanced sensitivity |
US6036807A (en) * | 1995-12-12 | 2000-03-14 | Ing Groep Nv | Method for applying a security code to an article |
US6043880A (en) * | 1997-09-15 | 2000-03-28 | Becton Dickinson And Company | Automated optical reader for nucleic acid assays |
US6174648B1 (en) * | 1997-07-08 | 2001-01-16 | Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd. | Optical filter fabrication method using fiber holder with spiral groove and phase mask with spiral diffraction grating |
US6194563B1 (en) * | 1999-03-26 | 2001-02-27 | Vysis, Inc. | Solid phase nucleic acid labeling by transamination |
US6204969B1 (en) * | 1997-12-08 | 2001-03-20 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Amplitude mask, and apparatus and method for manufacturing long period grating filter using the same |
US6204068B1 (en) * | 1995-03-07 | 2001-03-20 | Erkki Soini | Biospecific assay method |
US6335824B1 (en) * | 1998-03-20 | 2002-01-01 | Genetic Microsystems, Inc. | Wide field of view and high speed scanning microscopy |
US20020000471A1 (en) * | 2000-05-03 | 2002-01-03 | Soren Aasmul | Coding of cartridges for an injection device |
US20020006664A1 (en) * | 1999-09-17 | 2002-01-17 | Sabatini David M. | Arrayed transfection method and uses related thereto |
US6340588B1 (en) * | 1995-04-25 | 2002-01-22 | Discovery Partners International, Inc. | Matrices with memories |
US20020018430A1 (en) * | 1989-09-28 | 2002-02-14 | Gao Gesellschaft Fur Automation Und Organisation Mbh | Data carrier having an optically variable element and methods for producing it |
US20020022273A1 (en) * | 2000-04-06 | 2002-02-21 | Empedocles Stephen A. | Differentiable spectral bar code methods and systems |
US20020025534A1 (en) * | 2000-03-22 | 2002-02-28 | Goh M. Cynthia | Method and apparatus for assay for multiple analytes |
US6352854B1 (en) * | 1995-04-25 | 2002-03-05 | Discovery Partners International, Inc. | Remotely programmable matrices with memories |
US6355432B1 (en) * | 1989-06-07 | 2002-03-12 | Affymetrix Lnc. | Products for detecting nucleic acids |
US6356681B1 (en) * | 1999-07-09 | 2002-03-12 | Corning Incorporated | Method and apparatus for trimming the optical path length of optical fiber components |
US6355198B1 (en) * | 1996-03-15 | 2002-03-12 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Method of forming articles including waveguides via capillary micromolding and microtransfer molding |
US6359734B1 (en) * | 1997-06-06 | 2002-03-19 | Ovd Kinegram Ag | Surface pattern |
US20020034747A1 (en) * | 2000-03-22 | 2002-03-21 | Bruchez Marcel P. | Methods of using semiconductor nanocrystals in bead-based nucleic acid assays |
US6361958B1 (en) * | 1999-11-12 | 2002-03-26 | Motorola, Inc. | Biochannel assay for hybridization with biomaterial |
US6363097B1 (en) * | 1998-09-18 | 2002-03-26 | Nec Corporation | Semiconductor laser with a rewritable wavelength stabilizer |
US20030008323A1 (en) * | 1999-04-15 | 2003-01-09 | Ilya Ravkin | Chemical-library composition and method |
US6506342B1 (en) * | 1997-06-19 | 2003-01-14 | Robert D. Frankel | Tracking apparatus and method for use with combinatorial synthesis processes |
US20030021003A1 (en) * | 2001-07-25 | 2003-01-30 | Hiroaki Ono | Beam shutter |
US6515753B2 (en) * | 2000-05-19 | 2003-02-04 | Aclara Biosciences, Inc. | Optical alignment in capillary detection using capillary wall scatter |
US6514767B1 (en) * | 1999-10-06 | 2003-02-04 | Surromed, Inc. | Surface enhanced spectroscopy-active composite nanoparticles |
US20030032203A1 (en) * | 2001-07-10 | 2003-02-13 | Sabatini David M. | Small molecule microarrays |
US6522406B1 (en) * | 2001-04-20 | 2003-02-18 | Nanometrics Incorporated | Correcting the system polarization sensitivity of a metrology tool having a rotatable polarizer |
US6524793B1 (en) * | 1995-10-11 | 2003-02-25 | Luminex Corporation | Multiplexed analysis of clinical specimens apparatus and method |
US6678429B2 (en) * | 2001-08-27 | 2004-01-13 | Lightsmyth Technologies, Inc. | Amplitude and phase control in distributed optical structures |
US6689316B1 (en) * | 1998-05-29 | 2004-02-10 | Cambridge University Technical Services, Ltd. | Holographic sensors and their production |
US20040027968A1 (en) * | 2000-10-12 | 2004-02-12 | Hideyoshi Horimai | Optical information recording apparatus and method, optical information reproducing apparatus and method, optical information recording reproducing apparatus and method and optical information recording medium |
US6692912B1 (en) * | 1997-03-05 | 2004-02-17 | Matrix Technologies Corporation | Nucleic acid-containing polymerizable complex |
US6692031B2 (en) * | 1998-12-31 | 2004-02-17 | Mcgrew Stephen P. | Quantum dot security device and method |
USRE38430E1 (en) * | 1987-03-27 | 2004-02-17 | Becton, Dickinson And Company | Solid phase chromatographic immunoassay |
US20040047030A1 (en) * | 1997-10-29 | 2004-03-11 | Digital Optical Imaging Corporation | Apparatus and methods relating to spatially light modulated microscopy |
US6708618B1 (en) * | 2000-10-23 | 2004-03-23 | Chialun Tsai | Method and apparatus of using a security feature which includes plural patterned microscopic makers for authentication and to prevent counterfeiting of objects |
US6858184B2 (en) * | 2000-03-16 | 2005-02-22 | Sri International | Microlaboratory devices and methods |
US20050042764A1 (en) * | 2002-02-07 | 2005-02-24 | Sailor Michael J | Optically encoded particles |
US20050056587A1 (en) * | 2003-09-17 | 2005-03-17 | Vortechnics, Inc. | Apparatus for separating floating and non-floating particulate from a fluid stream |
US6982996B1 (en) * | 1999-12-06 | 2006-01-03 | Weatherford/Lamb, Inc. | Large diameter optical waveguide, grating, and laser |
US20060023310A1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2006-02-02 | Putnam Martin A | Optical identification element using separate or partially overlapped diffraction gratings |
US20060028727A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2006-02-09 | Moon John A | Method and apparatus for drug product tracking using encoded optical identification elements |
US20060050544A1 (en) * | 2002-10-09 | 2006-03-09 | Optware Corporation | Information recording method, reproducing method, and recording reproducing method utilizing holography |
US20060057729A1 (en) * | 2003-09-12 | 2006-03-16 | Illumina, Inc. | Diffraction grating-based encoded element having a substance disposed thereon |
US20060067179A1 (en) * | 2004-09-16 | 2006-03-30 | Optware Corporation | Optical information recording device and optical information reproduction device |
US7164533B2 (en) * | 2003-01-22 | 2007-01-16 | Cyvera Corporation | Hybrid random bead/chip based microarray |
US7190522B2 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2007-03-13 | Cyvera Corporation | Chemical synthesis using diffraction grating-based encoded optical elements |
US7339148B2 (en) * | 2002-12-16 | 2008-03-04 | Olympus America Inc. | Confocal microscope |
US7349158B2 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2008-03-25 | Cyvera Corporation | Diffraction grating-based encoded micro-particles for multiplexed experiments |
US20090034078A1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2009-02-05 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical identification element having a non-waveguide substrate |
US20090040885A1 (en) * | 2005-09-09 | 2009-02-12 | Optware Corporation | Search Method |
US20090073520A1 (en) * | 2004-11-17 | 2009-03-19 | Illumina, Inc. | Encoded microparticles and a method for fabricating |
US20100025482A1 (en) * | 2005-11-22 | 2010-02-04 | Illumina Corporation | Composition including an item and an encoded optical identification element that is physically associated with the item |
Family Cites Families (323)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3600223A (en) * | 1969-12-15 | 1971-08-17 | American Cyanamid Co | Process for cleaning polyglycolic acid fliaments useful as absorbable surgical sutures |
US3614193A (en) | 1970-04-15 | 1971-10-19 | Columbia Broadcasting Systems | Light scanning system utilizing diffraction optics |
US3928253A (en) | 1972-05-10 | 1975-12-23 | Horizons Inc | Process for recovery of clean polyester materials |
US3916182A (en) | 1972-08-21 | 1975-10-28 | Western Electric Co | Periodic dielectric waveguide filter |
FR2197495A5 (en) | 1972-08-25 | 1974-03-22 | Thomson Csf | |
US3880497A (en) | 1973-03-09 | 1975-04-29 | Xerox Corp | Method of storing optical information on a random carrier |
DE2312507A1 (en) | 1973-03-13 | 1974-09-26 | Max Planck Gesellschaft | DEVICE FOR X-RAY DIFFICULTY MEASUREMENTS USING WHITE X-RAYS |
US3891302A (en) | 1973-09-28 | 1975-06-24 | Western Electric Co | Method of filtering modes in optical waveguides |
DE2416652A1 (en) | 1974-04-05 | 1975-10-16 | Dierk Dr Flasdieck | Data card or carrier - is made from base material with indicators added using electrolytic or galvanic processes |
US3968476A (en) | 1974-07-17 | 1976-07-06 | Sperry Rand Corporation | Spurious signal removal in optical processor fingerprint identification apparatus |
SE388694B (en) | 1975-01-27 | 1976-10-11 | Kabi Ab | WAY TO PROVIDE AN ANTIGEN EXV IN SAMPLES OF BODY WHEATS, USING POROST BERAR MATERIAL BONDED OR ADSORBING ANTIBODIES |
US4053433A (en) * | 1975-02-19 | 1977-10-11 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Method of tagging with color-coded microparticles |
US4023010A (en) | 1975-09-08 | 1977-05-10 | Ncr Corporation | Optical identification system and reader for reading optical gratings on a record medium |
US4053228A (en) | 1975-12-12 | 1977-10-11 | Michael Schiller | Finger identification |
DE2648180C2 (en) | 1976-02-18 | 1978-09-07 | Hoechst Ag, 6000 Frankfurt | Device for checking the authenticity of an identity carrier |
CH598661A5 (en) | 1976-02-20 | 1978-05-12 | Von Ballmoos Fritz | Optical card reader for encoded data |
US4112037A (en) | 1977-01-31 | 1978-09-05 | Albany International Corp. | Process of making air filter fabric |
US4820006A (en) * | 1977-11-10 | 1989-04-11 | Constant James N | Holographic identification system using incoherent light |
US4301139A (en) | 1979-06-21 | 1981-11-17 | Ames-Yissum Ltd. | Multilayer column chromatography specific binding assay method, test device and test kit |
DE3009404A1 (en) | 1980-03-12 | 1981-09-17 | Philips Patentverwaltung Gmbh, 2000 Hamburg | DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING A MOVABLE ELECTROACUTIC SOUND TRANSDUCER |
EP0047326B1 (en) * | 1980-08-21 | 1984-10-31 | International Business Machines Corporation | Identification card comprising information in holographic form |
US4386274A (en) | 1980-11-10 | 1983-05-31 | Saul Altshuler | Isotope separation by standing waves |
EP0057271B1 (en) * | 1981-02-03 | 1984-10-10 | LGZ LANDIS & GYR ZUG AG | Method for preventing the sucessful forgery of documents and device therefor |
GB2118189B (en) | 1982-02-26 | 1985-05-15 | Shimadzu Corp | An automatic synthesizer for dna |
JPS58189558A (en) | 1982-04-28 | 1983-11-05 | Mochida Pharmaceut Co Ltd | Vessel for immunological measurement |
US4447546A (en) | 1982-08-23 | 1984-05-08 | Myron J. Block | Fluorescent immunoassay employing optical fiber in capillary tube |
CA1237645A (en) | 1982-12-21 | 1988-06-07 | John H. Fisher | Assay technique |
US4937048A (en) | 1983-01-31 | 1990-06-26 | Olympus Optical Company Limited | Carrier transporting apparatus and carrier container for use in an immunological analysis |
FR2544720B1 (en) | 1983-04-19 | 1987-11-27 | California Inst Of Techn | IMPROVED INSTALLATION AND METHOD FOR THE SYNTHESIS OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS, IN PARTICULAR OLIGONUCLEOTIDES |
GB8314523D0 (en) | 1983-05-25 | 1983-06-29 | Lowe C R | Diagnostic device |
US4496046A (en) | 1983-09-15 | 1985-01-29 | Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. | Multiple chamber container with inner diaphragm and intermediate chamber |
DE3424384A1 (en) | 1983-11-11 | 1985-05-23 | Erno Raumfahrttechnik Gmbh, 2800 Bremen | METHOD FOR DESTRUCTION-FREE TESTING |
EP0149168B1 (en) | 1983-12-19 | 1991-04-24 | Daiichi Pure Chemicals Co. Ltd. | Immunoassay |
US4560881A (en) | 1984-03-13 | 1985-12-24 | Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. | Method and apparatus for enhanced detection of electromagnetic signals |
NZ211888A (en) | 1984-05-10 | 1987-08-31 | Abbott Lab | Biotin-antibiotin immunoassay for detecting ligands |
USRE33581E (en) | 1984-06-25 | 1991-04-30 | Immunoassay using optical interference detection | |
GB8423204D0 (en) | 1984-09-14 | 1984-10-17 | Comtech Res Unit | Assay technique and equipment |
CA1266385A (en) * | 1985-01-08 | 1990-03-06 | Koji Kikuchi | Washing machine with a turbidimeter and method of operating the same |
US4740468A (en) | 1985-02-14 | 1988-04-26 | Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. | Concentrating immunochemical test device and method |
GB8509492D0 (en) | 1985-04-12 | 1985-05-15 | Plessey Co Plc | Optical assay |
US4701754A (en) * | 1985-04-18 | 1987-10-20 | Fmc Corporation | Indicator device for substance receiving wells in a microtiter plate |
US4685480A (en) | 1985-08-30 | 1987-08-11 | Abbott Laboratories | Combined washer and aspirator |
US4716121A (en) | 1985-09-09 | 1987-12-29 | Ord, Inc. | Fluorescent assays, including immunoassays, with feature of flowing sample |
US4748110A (en) | 1985-09-25 | 1988-05-31 | Abbott Laboratories | Immunoassay for HTLV-III antigens |
US4678752A (en) | 1985-11-18 | 1987-07-07 | Becton, Dickinson And Company | Automatic random access analyzer |
AU587103B2 (en) * | 1985-12-20 | 1989-08-03 | Gerhard Wolfgang Osterreicher | Pattern recognition process |
US4958376A (en) | 1985-12-27 | 1990-09-18 | Grumman Aerospace Corporation | Robotic vision, optical correlation system |
US5160701A (en) | 1986-02-18 | 1992-11-03 | Abbott Laboratories | Solid-phase analytical device and method for using same |
US4740688A (en) | 1986-03-20 | 1988-04-26 | Smiths Industries Public Limited Company | Optical transducers with wavelength coding |
GB8607975D0 (en) * | 1986-04-01 | 1986-05-08 | Fisons Plc | Devices |
GB8612221D0 (en) | 1986-05-20 | 1986-06-25 | Amersham Int Plc | Assaying species in sample |
US4822746A (en) | 1986-06-25 | 1989-04-18 | Trustees Of Tufts College | Radiative and non-radiative energy transfer and absorbance modulated fluorescence detection methods and sensors |
US5143853A (en) | 1986-06-25 | 1992-09-01 | Trustees Of Tufts College | Absorbance modulated fluorescence detection methods and sensors |
US5114864A (en) | 1986-06-25 | 1992-05-19 | Trustees Of Tufts College | Fiber optic sensors, apparatus, and detection methods using fluid erodible controlled release polymers for delivery of reagent formulations |
US5714380A (en) | 1986-10-23 | 1998-02-03 | Amoco Corporation | Closed vessel for isolating target molecules and for performing amplification |
US5030558A (en) | 1986-11-07 | 1991-07-09 | Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. | Qualitative immunochromatographic method and device |
US5141848A (en) | 1987-01-21 | 1992-08-25 | Abbott Laboratories | Confirmatory immunoassay using microparticle separation |
GB8705649D0 (en) | 1987-03-10 | 1987-04-15 | Pa Consulting Services | Assay sensor |
SE458968B (en) | 1987-06-16 | 1989-05-22 | Wallac Oy | BIOSPECIFIC ANALYTICAL PROCEDURE FOR MULTIPLE ANALYTICS WHICH DO NOT INCLUDE PARTICULAR COATING AND LABELING WITH FLUORESCING LABEL SUBSTANCES |
US4921805A (en) | 1987-07-29 | 1990-05-01 | Life Technologies, Inc. | Nucleic acid capture method |
AU604364B2 (en) | 1987-08-13 | 1990-12-13 | Dow Chemical Company, The | Sulfur dioxide removal from gas streams using hydroxyalkyl substituted piperazinones |
US4841140A (en) | 1987-11-09 | 1989-06-20 | Honeywell Inc. | Real-time color comparator |
US5449602A (en) | 1988-01-13 | 1995-09-12 | Amoco Corporation | Template-directed photoligation |
US5166813A (en) | 1988-05-31 | 1992-11-24 | Nygene Corporation | Optical evaluation using a hologram barrier filter |
DE69017204T2 (en) | 1989-03-10 | 1995-08-03 | Amoco Corp | IMMOBILIZED OLIGONUCLEOTIDE PROBE AND THEIR USE. |
US5033826A (en) | 1989-03-27 | 1991-07-23 | Hewlett-Packard Company | High temporal resolution optical instrument |
CA1337173C (en) | 1989-04-28 | 1995-10-03 | Westaim Biomedical Corp. | Thin film diagnostic device |
US5143854A (en) | 1989-06-07 | 1992-09-01 | Affymax Technologies N.V. | Large scale photolithographic solid phase synthesis of polypeptides and receptor binding screening thereof |
US6379895B1 (en) | 1989-06-07 | 2002-04-30 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Photolithographic and other means for manufacturing arrays |
US5200794A (en) | 1989-08-11 | 1993-04-06 | Nhk Spring Co., Ltd. | Optical head for an optical authenticity identifing system |
US5442433A (en) | 1989-08-11 | 1995-08-15 | Nhk Spring Co., Ltd. | Identification system for an article having individually attached patches |
US5065008A (en) | 1989-10-18 | 1991-11-12 | Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. | Scanning microscope and scanning mechanism for the same |
US5115121A (en) | 1990-01-05 | 1992-05-19 | Control Module Inc. | Variable-sweep bar code reader |
US5138468A (en) | 1990-02-02 | 1992-08-11 | Dz Company | Keyless holographic lock |
JPH0834003B2 (en) | 1990-03-08 | 1996-03-29 | 直弘 丹野 | Optical waveguide storage medium and optical reproducing device |
DE59109246D1 (en) | 1990-05-03 | 2003-04-03 | Hoffmann La Roche | Micro-optical sensor |
US5067155A (en) | 1990-05-09 | 1991-11-19 | Control Module Inc. | Method and means to limit access to computer systems |
EP0745689A3 (en) | 1990-05-11 | 1996-12-11 | Microprobe Corporation | A dipstick for a nucleic acid hybridization assay |
US5667976A (en) | 1990-05-11 | 1997-09-16 | Becton Dickinson And Company | Solid supports for nucleic acid hybridization assays |
US5129974A (en) | 1990-08-23 | 1992-07-14 | Colorcode Unlimited Corporation | Microlabelling system and method of making thin labels |
US5700636A (en) | 1990-10-19 | 1997-12-23 | Becton Dickinson And Company | Methods for selectively detecting microorganisms associated with vaginal infections in complex biological samples |
US5239178A (en) | 1990-11-10 | 1993-08-24 | Carl Zeiss | Optical device with an illuminating grid and detector grid arranged confocally to an object |
DE69132843T2 (en) | 1990-12-06 | 2002-09-12 | Affymetrix, Inc. (N.D.Ges.D.Staates Delaware) | Identification of nucleic acids in samples |
US5105305A (en) | 1991-01-10 | 1992-04-14 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Near-field scanning optical microscope using a fluorescent probe |
US5244636A (en) | 1991-01-25 | 1993-09-14 | Trustees Of Tufts College | Imaging fiber optic array sensors, apparatus, and methods for concurrently detecting multiple analytes of interest in a fluid sample |
US5104209A (en) | 1991-02-19 | 1992-04-14 | Her Majesty The Queen In Right Of Canada, As Represented By The Minister Of Communications | Method of creating an index grating in an optical fiber and a mode converter using the index grating |
US5367588A (en) | 1992-10-29 | 1994-11-22 | Her Majesty The Queen In Right Of Canada, As Represented By The Minister Of Communications | Method of fabricating Bragg gratings using a silica glass phase grating mask and mask used by same |
DE4111903A1 (en) | 1991-04-12 | 1992-10-15 | Bayer Ag | SPECTROSCOPY-CORRECTED LIGHT-SCREEN MICROSCOPY |
US5144461A (en) | 1991-06-20 | 1992-09-01 | Horan Philip R | Portable holographic recording apparatus |
US5837552A (en) | 1991-07-22 | 1998-11-17 | Medifor, Ltd. | Surface-enhanced analytical procedures and substrates |
EP0554447B1 (en) | 1991-08-28 | 1997-04-09 | Becton, Dickinson and Company | Gravitational attractor engine for adaptively autoclustering n-dimensional data streams |
JP2561186B2 (en) | 1991-09-11 | 1996-12-04 | 日本発条株式会社 | Object identification structure |
US5349442A (en) | 1991-09-20 | 1994-09-20 | Eg&G Idaho, Inc. | Hand held phase-shifting diffraction moire interferometer |
US5742432A (en) | 1991-12-19 | 1998-04-21 | Bianco; James S. | Apparatus for manufacture of diffraction gratings for identification means |
US5465176A (en) | 1991-12-19 | 1995-11-07 | Control Module Inc. | Method of embossing repeating patterns on a substrate, the patterns having different rates of repetition |
US5432329A (en) | 1992-02-07 | 1995-07-11 | American Bank Note Holographics | Automated holographic optical recognition and decoding system for verification |
US5374818A (en) | 1992-03-09 | 1994-12-20 | Control Module Inc. | Identification means with integral memory device |
US5376313A (en) | 1992-03-27 | 1994-12-27 | Abbott Laboratories | Injection molding a plastic assay cuvette having low birefringence |
DE69333369T2 (en) * | 1992-05-01 | 2004-10-07 | Sumitomo Electric Industries | Optical line identification method |
US5372783A (en) | 1992-08-03 | 1994-12-13 | Sapidyne, Inc. | Assay system |
US5410147A (en) * | 1992-08-20 | 1995-04-25 | General Electric Company | Optical communication system using coplanar light modulators |
US5342790A (en) | 1992-10-30 | 1994-08-30 | Becton Dickinson And Company | Apparatus for indirect fluorescent assay of blood samples |
AT403967B (en) | 1992-11-18 | 1998-07-27 | Oesterr Nationalbank | DOCUMENT AND FILM STRUCTURE FOR PRODUCING A DOCUMENT |
US5625472A (en) | 1992-12-23 | 1997-04-29 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Method for forming distributed Bragg reflectors in optical media |
DE69407628T2 (en) | 1993-02-01 | 1998-08-27 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Waveguide image transmission device and fingerprint identification device |
US5547849A (en) | 1993-02-17 | 1996-08-20 | Biometric Imaging, Inc. | Apparatus and method for volumetric capillary cytometry |
SE501108C2 (en) | 1993-04-08 | 1994-11-14 | Pharmacia Lkb Biotech | Method and apparatus for determining refractive index |
JP3563140B2 (en) | 1995-01-19 | 2004-09-08 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Capillary array electrophoresis device |
US5364797A (en) | 1993-05-20 | 1994-11-15 | Mobil Oil Corp. | Sensor device containing mesoporous crystalline material |
US20020197456A1 (en) | 1993-06-30 | 2002-12-26 | Pope Edward J. A. | Integrated electro-luminescent biochip |
US6406841B1 (en) | 1993-07-01 | 2002-06-18 | Abbott Laboratories | Methods for the detection of HTLV-II antibodies employing novel HTLV-II NRA envelope peptides |
US6087186A (en) | 1993-07-16 | 2000-07-11 | Irori | Methods and apparatus for synthesizing labeled combinatorial chemistry libraries |
FR2709003B1 (en) | 1993-08-09 | 1995-09-15 | Deveaud Pledran Benoit | Photorefractive device with quantum wells. |
US5500356A (en) | 1993-08-10 | 1996-03-19 | Life Technologies, Inc. | Method of nucleic acid sequence selection |
US5382512A (en) * | 1993-08-23 | 1995-01-17 | Chiron Corporation | Assay device with captured particle reagent |
US5793502A (en) | 1993-08-31 | 1998-08-11 | Bianco; James S. | Secure optical identification means and method with enhanced variability |
EP0644508B1 (en) | 1993-08-31 | 1999-12-22 | Control Module, Inc. | Secure optical identification method and means |
US5426297A (en) | 1993-09-27 | 1995-06-20 | United Technologies Corporation | Multiplexed Bragg grating sensors |
US5587832A (en) | 1993-10-20 | 1996-12-24 | Biophysica Technologies, Inc. | Spatially light modulated confocal microscope and method |
US6156501A (en) | 1993-10-26 | 2000-12-05 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Arrays of modified nucleic acid probes and methods of use |
US5352582A (en) | 1993-10-28 | 1994-10-04 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Holographic based bio-assay |
US6309601B1 (en) | 1993-11-01 | 2001-10-30 | Nanogen, Inc. | Scanning optical detection system |
JPH07210071A (en) | 1994-01-25 | 1995-08-11 | Nhk Spring Co Ltd | Discrimination system for object |
US5461475A (en) | 1994-02-02 | 1995-10-24 | Physical Optics Corporation | Binary optical spectrum analyzer |
AUPM386794A0 (en) | 1994-02-14 | 1994-03-10 | University Of Sydney, The | Optical grating |
US5468649A (en) | 1994-02-15 | 1995-11-21 | Abbott Laboratories | Process for labeling acridinium to microparticles and application in an instrument |
US5682244A (en) * | 1994-03-25 | 1997-10-28 | Barlow; Clyde H. | Automated optical detection of tissue perfusion by microspheres |
GB9406142D0 (en) | 1994-03-28 | 1994-05-18 | British Tech Group | A sensor |
GB9409033D0 (en) * | 1994-05-06 | 1994-06-29 | Univ Southampton | Optical fibre laser |
US5479515A (en) | 1994-05-11 | 1995-12-26 | Welch Allyn, Inc. | One-dimensional bar code symbology and method of using same |
EP0760944B1 (en) | 1994-05-27 | 2002-04-17 | Novartis AG | Process for detecting evanescently excited luminescence |
US5976896A (en) | 1994-06-06 | 1999-11-02 | Idexx Laboratories, Inc. | Immunoassays in capillary tubes |
US5624850A (en) | 1994-06-06 | 1997-04-29 | Idetek, Inc. | Immunoassays in capillaries |
US5472515A (en) | 1994-08-01 | 1995-12-05 | Worldsource Coil Coating, Inc. | Apparatus for the pretreatment of moving metal strip |
US5992742A (en) | 1994-08-05 | 1999-11-30 | Sullivan; Scott L. | Pill printing and identification |
CN1032390C (en) | 1994-08-15 | 1996-07-24 | 孟武 | Double-card-track laser holographic anti-counterfeiting mark and inspection device thereof |
US5633790A (en) | 1995-01-18 | 1997-05-27 | Eaton Corporation | DV/DT limiting of inverter output voltage |
US5753947A (en) | 1995-01-20 | 1998-05-19 | Micron Technology, Inc. | Very high-density DRAM cell structure and method for fabricating it |
US5986838A (en) | 1995-02-14 | 1999-11-16 | Iomega Corporation | Thin retroreflective marker for data storage cartridge |
US6159748A (en) | 1995-03-13 | 2000-12-12 | Affinitech, Ltd | Evaluation of autoimmune diseases using a multiple parameter latex bead suspension and flow cytometry |
US6314220B1 (en) | 1995-03-13 | 2001-11-06 | Templex Technology, Inc. | Segmented complex fiber gratings |
DE59500254D1 (en) | 1995-03-16 | 1997-06-26 | Landis & Gyr Tech Innovat | Optical information carrier |
DE19510102C1 (en) | 1995-03-20 | 1996-10-02 | Rainer Dr Uhl | Confocal fluorescence microscope |
US5528045A (en) | 1995-04-06 | 1996-06-18 | Becton Dickinson And Company | Particle analyzer with spatially split wavelength filter |
US6331273B1 (en) | 1995-04-25 | 2001-12-18 | Discovery Partners International | Remotely programmable matrices with memories |
US5925562A (en) | 1995-04-25 | 1999-07-20 | Irori | Remotely programmable matrices with memories |
US5874214A (en) | 1995-04-25 | 1999-02-23 | Irori | Remotely programmable matrices with memories |
US6319668B1 (en) | 1995-04-25 | 2001-11-20 | Discovery Partners International | Method for tagging and screening molecules |
US6416714B1 (en) | 1995-04-25 | 2002-07-09 | Discovery Partners International, Inc. | Remotely programmable matrices with memories |
US6284459B1 (en) | 1995-04-25 | 2001-09-04 | Discovery Partners International | Solid support matrices with memories and combinatorial libraries therefrom |
US6143247A (en) | 1996-12-20 | 2000-11-07 | Gamera Bioscience Inc. | Affinity binding-based system for detecting particulates in a fluid |
US5585639A (en) | 1995-07-27 | 1996-12-17 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Optical scanning apparatus |
US5633724A (en) | 1995-08-29 | 1997-05-27 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Evanescent scanning of biochemical array |
US5736330A (en) | 1995-10-11 | 1998-04-07 | Luminex Corporation | Method and compositions for flow cytometric determination of DNA sequences |
EP0798573A4 (en) | 1995-10-16 | 1998-06-17 | Sumitomo Electric Industries | Optical fiber diffraction grating, production method thereof and laser light source |
US20030203390A1 (en) * | 1995-10-26 | 2003-10-30 | Kaye Paul H. | Coded particles for process sequence tracking in combinatorial compound library preparation |
GB9521943D0 (en) | 1995-10-26 | 1996-01-03 | Univ Hertfordshire | Coded particles for process sequence tracking in combinatorial compound library preparation |
US5633975A (en) * | 1995-11-14 | 1997-05-27 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration | Security system responsive to optical fiber having Bragg grating |
EP1182055B1 (en) | 1995-11-28 | 2007-03-21 | OVD Kinegram AG | Optical information carrier |
US5700037A (en) | 1996-01-16 | 1997-12-23 | Keller; John A. | Security improved card |
CA2241544C (en) | 1996-01-16 | 2003-09-16 | British Telecommunications Public Limited Company | Method and device for recording a refractive index pattern in an optical medium |
GB9602542D0 (en) | 1996-02-08 | 1996-04-10 | Fisons Plc | Analytical device |
US5824557A (en) | 1996-04-02 | 1998-10-20 | Panvera Corporation | Method for detecting and quantitating nucleic acid impurities in biochemical preparations |
US6272886B1 (en) | 1996-10-23 | 2001-08-14 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Incremental method of producing multiple UV-induced gratings on a single optical fiber |
US7144119B2 (en) * | 1996-04-25 | 2006-12-05 | Bioarray Solutions Ltd. | System and method for programmable illumination pattern generation |
EP1021554B1 (en) * | 1996-04-25 | 2007-03-21 | Genicon Sciences Corporation | Analyte assay using particulate labels |
US5824478A (en) | 1996-04-30 | 1998-10-20 | Vysis, Inc. | Diagnostic methods and probes |
US6103535A (en) | 1996-05-31 | 2000-08-15 | University Of Maryland | Optical fiber evanescent field excited fluorosensor and method of manufacture |
US6304263B1 (en) | 1996-06-05 | 2001-10-16 | Hyper3D Corp. | Three-dimensional display system: apparatus and method |
US6329963B1 (en) | 1996-06-05 | 2001-12-11 | Cyberlogic, Inc. | Three-dimensional display system: apparatus and method |
US6259450B1 (en) | 1996-06-05 | 2001-07-10 | Hyper3D Corp. | Three-dimensional display system apparatus and method |
WO1998001071A1 (en) | 1996-07-08 | 1998-01-15 | Animas Corporation | Implantable sensor and system for in vivo measurement and control of fluid constituent levels |
US5799231A (en) | 1996-07-25 | 1998-08-25 | International Business Machines Corporation | Variable index distributed mirror |
US5846737A (en) | 1996-07-26 | 1998-12-08 | Molecular Probes, Inc. | Conjugates of sulforhodamine fluorophores with enhanced fluorescence |
US6322932B1 (en) | 1996-08-15 | 2001-11-27 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Holographic process and media therefor |
US5831698A (en) | 1996-08-20 | 1998-11-03 | International Business Machines Corporation | Electrically variable diffuser |
US6395558B1 (en) | 1996-08-29 | 2002-05-28 | Zeptosens Ag | Optical chemical/biochemical sensor |
US5798273A (en) | 1996-09-25 | 1998-08-25 | Becton Dickinson And Company | Direct read lateral flow assay for small analytes |
US5745615A (en) * | 1996-10-11 | 1998-04-28 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Method of making an optical fiber grating, and article made by the method |
US6875620B1 (en) | 1996-10-31 | 2005-04-05 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Tiling process for constructing a chemical array |
US5804384A (en) | 1996-12-06 | 1998-09-08 | Vysis, Inc. | Devices and methods for detecting multiple analytes in samples |
US6005691A (en) | 1996-12-11 | 1999-12-21 | Hewlett-Packard Company | High-security machine-readable holographic card |
US5922550A (en) | 1996-12-18 | 1999-07-13 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Biosensing devices which produce diffraction images |
US5745617A (en) | 1996-12-30 | 1998-04-28 | D-Star Technologies, Llc | Near-ultra-violet formation of refractive-index grating using reflective phase mask |
AU5811198A (en) | 1996-12-30 | 1998-07-31 | D-Star Technologies, Llc | Near-ultraviolet formation of refractive-index grating using phase mask |
US5812272A (en) | 1997-01-30 | 1998-09-22 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Apparatus and method with tiled light source array for integrated assay sensing |
US5837475A (en) | 1997-01-30 | 1998-11-17 | Hewlett-Packard Co. | Apparatus and method for scanning a chemical array |
SE9700383D0 (en) | 1997-02-04 | 1997-02-04 | Pharmacia Biotech Ab | An adsorption / separation method and a medium for adsorption / separation |
DE19707227A1 (en) | 1997-02-24 | 1998-08-27 | Bodenseewerk Perkin Elmer Co | Light scanner |
US6542673B1 (en) * | 1997-03-13 | 2003-04-01 | Cirrex Corp. | Identifier system and components for optical assemblies |
US6046925A (en) | 1997-04-14 | 2000-04-04 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Photochromic fluorescent proteins and optical memory storage devices based on fluorescent proteins |
US5981166A (en) | 1997-04-23 | 1999-11-09 | Pharmaseq, Inc. | Screening of soluble chemical compounds for their pharmacological properties utilizing transponders |
TW434193B (en) | 1997-05-01 | 2001-05-16 | Sumitomo Electric Industries | Method of producing optical fiber grating |
CA2291180A1 (en) | 1997-05-23 | 1998-11-26 | Lynx Therapeutics, Inc. | System and apparatus for sequential processing of analytes |
US5766956A (en) | 1997-05-27 | 1998-06-16 | American Research Corporation | Diode laser-based chemical and biological sensor |
US20020084329A1 (en) * | 1997-07-16 | 2002-07-04 | Kaye Paul H. | Coded items for labeling objects |
JP3472092B2 (en) * | 1997-07-28 | 2003-12-02 | キヤノン株式会社 | Diffractive optical element and optical system using the same |
US5925878A (en) | 1997-08-20 | 1999-07-20 | Imation Corp. | Diffraction anomaly sensor having grating coated with protective dielectric layer |
US6035083A (en) | 1997-10-02 | 2000-03-07 | 3M Innovative Company | Method for writing arbitrary index perturbations in a wave-guiding structure |
US7348181B2 (en) * | 1997-10-06 | 2008-03-25 | Trustees Of Tufts College | Self-encoding sensor with microspheres |
DE19745294A1 (en) | 1997-10-14 | 1999-04-15 | Biotronik Mess & Therapieg | Process for the production of fine-structured medical technology implants |
EP0911667B1 (en) | 1997-10-22 | 2003-04-02 | Max-Planck-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der Wissenschaften e.V. | Programmable spatially light modulated microscope and microscopy method |
US5922617A (en) | 1997-11-12 | 1999-07-13 | Functional Genetics, Inc. | Rapid screening assay methods and devices |
EP0916981B1 (en) | 1997-11-17 | 2004-07-28 | Max-Planck-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der Wissenschaften e.V. | Confocal spectroscopy system and method |
US6060256A (en) | 1997-12-16 | 2000-05-09 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Optical diffraction biosensor |
US6084995A (en) | 1997-12-19 | 2000-07-04 | Nortel Networks Corporation | Reducing scanning errors |
US5998796A (en) | 1997-12-22 | 1999-12-07 | Spectrumedix Corporation | Detector having a transmission grating beam splitter for multi-wavelength sample analysis |
US6160656A (en) | 1998-01-07 | 2000-12-12 | Templex Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for optical correlation recognition by time-integrated nonlinear detection |
US6088503A (en) | 1998-02-02 | 2000-07-11 | Ciena Corporation | Optical fiber precision handling tool |
US6164548A (en) | 1998-02-05 | 2000-12-26 | Safecard Id System, Inc. | Methods of creating a tamper resistant informational article |
US6560017B1 (en) | 1998-03-02 | 2003-05-06 | James S. Bianco | Compound secure optical identification method and means |
JP3944996B2 (en) | 1998-03-05 | 2007-07-18 | 株式会社日立製作所 | DNA probe array |
CN1145125C (en) | 1998-03-06 | 2004-04-07 | 安全图形公司 | Identification mark comprising optically and electronically readable marking |
US6496287B1 (en) | 1998-04-09 | 2002-12-17 | Rolic Ag | Optical identification element |
US6462770B1 (en) | 1998-04-20 | 2002-10-08 | Xillix Technologies Corp. | Imaging system with automatic gain control for reflectance and fluorescence endoscopy |
US6078048A (en) | 1998-04-27 | 2000-06-20 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Immersion echelle spectrograph |
US6242056B1 (en) * | 1998-05-08 | 2001-06-05 | Innovative Concepts Unlimited, Llc | Process for applying light-emission-enhancement microbead paint compositions |
AU4076899A (en) | 1998-05-13 | 1999-11-29 | Spectra Science Corporation | Micro-lasing beads and structures, and associated methods |
FR2778986B1 (en) | 1998-05-22 | 2000-07-21 | Suisse Electronique Microtech | OPTICAL SENSOR USING AN IMMUNOLOGICAL REACTION AND A FLUORESCENT MARKER |
US6285806B1 (en) | 1998-05-31 | 2001-09-04 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy | Coherent reflectometric fiber Bragg grating sensor array |
US6657758B1 (en) | 1998-06-04 | 2003-12-02 | Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System | Variable spectrum generator system |
US6762061B1 (en) * | 1998-07-03 | 2004-07-13 | Corning Incorporated | Redrawn capillary imaging reservoir |
DE69921029T2 (en) | 1998-07-13 | 2006-03-09 | Dai Nippon Printing Co., Ltd. | Ferroelectric liquid crystalline charge transport material |
US6292282B1 (en) | 1998-08-10 | 2001-09-18 | Templex Technology, Inc. | Time-wavelength multiple access optical communication systems and methods |
US5907407A (en) | 1998-08-10 | 1999-05-25 | Innovative Lasers Corporation | ILS sensors for alcohol detection within vehicles |
US6296189B1 (en) | 1998-08-26 | 2001-10-02 | Spectra Science Corporation. | Methods and apparatus employing multi-spectral imaging for the remote identification and sorting of objects |
JP4268336B2 (en) | 1998-08-27 | 2009-05-27 | 新日本石油株式会社 | Authenticity identification system and method of using authenticity identification film |
US6277628B1 (en) | 1998-10-02 | 2001-08-21 | Incyte Genomics, Inc. | Linear microarrays |
WO2000021093A1 (en) | 1998-10-05 | 2000-04-13 | Templex Technology, Inc. | Spatially-spectrally swept optical memories and addressing methods |
KR100283953B1 (en) | 1998-10-07 | 2001-03-02 | 윤종용 | Long Cycle Fiber Optic Grid Fabrication Device |
US7014815B1 (en) | 1998-10-30 | 2006-03-21 | Burstein Technologies, Inc. | Trackable optical discs with concurrently readable nonoperational features |
JP4336008B2 (en) | 1998-11-17 | 2009-09-30 | 日本発條株式会社 | Object identification structure and identification method |
US6229827B1 (en) | 1998-12-04 | 2001-05-08 | Cidra Corporation | Compression-tuned bragg grating and laser |
US6221579B1 (en) | 1998-12-11 | 2001-04-24 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Patterned binding of functionalized microspheres for optical diffraction-based biosensors |
JP4454155B2 (en) | 1999-01-08 | 2010-04-21 | アプライド バイオシステムズ, エルエルシー | Fiber arrays for contacting chemical species and methods of using and making fiber arrays |
GB2345979A (en) | 1999-01-23 | 2000-07-26 | Ibm | High reflectivity bistable liquid crystal display |
WO2000043828A1 (en) | 1999-01-26 | 2000-07-27 | Templex Technology, Inc. | Dynamically reconfigurable composite grating filters for temporal waveform processing |
US6328209B1 (en) | 1999-02-03 | 2001-12-11 | American Bank Note Holographics, Inc. | Card security system |
ATE508200T1 (en) | 1999-02-23 | 2011-05-15 | Caliper Life Sciences Inc | SEQUENCING THROUGH INCORPORATION |
EP1031828B1 (en) | 1999-02-25 | 2006-09-13 | C.S.E.M. Centre Suisse D'electronique Et De Microtechnique Sa | Integrated-optical sensor and method for integrated-optically sensing a substance |
JP3872227B2 (en) | 1999-02-26 | 2007-01-24 | 北斗科学産業株式会社 | Novel biological chip and analytical method |
US6097485A (en) | 1999-03-08 | 2000-08-01 | Integrated Waveguides, Inc. | Microchip optical transport technology for use in a personal flow cytometer |
US20030129654A1 (en) * | 1999-04-15 | 2003-07-10 | Ilya Ravkin | Coded particles for multiplexed analysis of biological samples |
US6622916B1 (en) | 1999-05-03 | 2003-09-23 | James S. Bianco | Optical indicia scanner and method of use |
US6371370B2 (en) | 1999-05-24 | 2002-04-16 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for scanning a surface |
JP2003501654A (en) | 1999-06-05 | 2003-01-14 | ツェプトゼンス アクチエンゲゼルシャフト | Sensor platform and method for measurement of multiple analytes |
AU773950B2 (en) | 1999-07-16 | 2004-06-10 | Applera Corporation | High density electrophoresis device and method |
US6635863B1 (en) | 1999-08-06 | 2003-10-21 | Mitutoyo Corporation | Optical encoder |
JP2003527087A (en) * | 1999-08-13 | 2003-09-16 | イェール・ユニバーシティ | Binary coded array tags |
US6874639B2 (en) | 1999-08-23 | 2005-04-05 | Spectra Systems Corporation | Methods and apparatus employing multi-spectral imaging for the remote identification and sorting of objects |
US6344298B1 (en) | 1999-08-26 | 2002-02-05 | Sabeus Photonics, Inc. | Circumferentially varying mask and fabrication of fiber gratings using a mask |
US6613581B1 (en) | 1999-08-26 | 2003-09-02 | Caliper Technologies Corp. | Microfluidic analytic detection assays, devices, and integrated systems |
JP2001091715A (en) | 1999-09-27 | 2001-04-06 | Nippon Mitsubishi Oil Corp | Composite diffraction device |
US20040209376A1 (en) | 1999-10-01 | 2004-10-21 | Surromed, Inc. | Assemblies of differentiable segmented particles |
US7225082B1 (en) | 1999-10-01 | 2007-05-29 | Oxonica, Inc. | Colloidal rod particles as nanobar codes |
US6919009B2 (en) | 1999-10-01 | 2005-07-19 | Nanoplex Technologies, Inc. | Method of manufacture of colloidal rod particles as nanobarcodes |
US7045049B1 (en) | 1999-10-01 | 2006-05-16 | Nanoplex Technologies, Inc. | Method of manufacture of colloidal rod particles as nanobar codes |
US6428957B1 (en) | 1999-11-08 | 2002-08-06 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Systems tools and methods of assaying biological materials using spatially-addressable arrays |
US6313771B1 (en) | 1999-11-17 | 2001-11-06 | Templex Technology, Inc. | Codes, methods, and apparatus for optical encoding and decoding |
US6321007B1 (en) | 1999-11-24 | 2001-11-20 | Cidra Corporation | Optical fiber having a bragg grating formed in its cladding |
JP3856609B2 (en) | 1999-12-09 | 2006-12-13 | 沖電気工業株式会社 | Manufacturing method of optical waveguide element |
US6399295B1 (en) | 1999-12-17 | 2002-06-04 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Use of wicking agent to eliminate wash steps for optical diffraction-based biosensors |
AU3976001A (en) * | 2000-02-10 | 2001-08-20 | Illumina Inc | Alternative substrates and formats for bead-based array of arrays<sup>TM</sup> |
US6985656B2 (en) | 2000-03-16 | 2006-01-10 | Lightsmyth Technologies Inc | Temperature-compensated planar waveguide optical apparatus |
US20020090650A1 (en) | 2000-04-06 | 2002-07-11 | Quantum Dot Corporation | Two-dimensional spectral imaging system |
US6489606B1 (en) | 2000-04-07 | 2002-12-03 | Cidra Corporation | Bragg grating sensor system with spectral response or code division multiplexing |
EP1281063A1 (en) | 2000-05-06 | 2003-02-05 | Zeptosens AG | Grating optical waveguide structure for multi-analyte determinations and the use thereof |
WO2001090225A1 (en) | 2000-05-22 | 2001-11-29 | Kabushiki Kaisya Advance | Novel method for forming polymer pattern |
EP1284992A2 (en) * | 2000-05-30 | 2003-02-26 | Viridis Biotech Inc. | Polyubiquitin based hydrogel and uses thereof |
GB0013139D0 (en) * | 2000-05-30 | 2000-07-19 | Univ Nottingham | Improvements in and relating to microscopy |
WO2002001194A1 (en) * | 2000-06-25 | 2002-01-03 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Optically active substrates |
JP3639202B2 (en) * | 2000-07-05 | 2005-04-20 | 株式会社オプトウエア | Optical information recording apparatus and method, optical information reproducing apparatus and method, and optical information recording and reproducing apparatus and method |
US6545758B1 (en) * | 2000-08-17 | 2003-04-08 | Perry Sandstrom | Microarray detector and synthesizer |
CA2319898C (en) * | 2000-09-18 | 2006-05-16 | Institut National D'optique | Position encoding optical device and method |
WO2002025257A1 (en) | 2000-09-22 | 2002-03-28 | Kawasaki Steel Corporation | Quantitative measuring method and apparatus of metal phase using x-ray diffraction method, and method for making plated steel sheet using them |
US20030045005A1 (en) | 2000-10-17 | 2003-03-06 | Michael Seul | Light-controlled electrokinetic assembly of particles near surfaces |
US6565770B1 (en) | 2000-11-17 | 2003-05-20 | Flex Products, Inc. | Color-shifting pigments and foils with luminescent coatings |
US20030082568A1 (en) * | 2000-11-27 | 2003-05-01 | Phan Brigitte Chau | Use of restriction enzymes and other chemical methods to decrease non-specific binding in dual bead assays and related bio-discs, methods, and system apparatus for detecting medical targets |
US20020094528A1 (en) * | 2000-11-29 | 2002-07-18 | Salafsky Joshua S. | Method and apparatus using a surface-selective nonlinear optical technique for detection of probe-target interations |
US6760298B2 (en) | 2000-12-08 | 2004-07-06 | Nagaoka & Co., Ltd. | Multiple data layer optical discs for detecting analytes |
JP3639212B2 (en) * | 2000-12-11 | 2005-04-20 | 株式会社オプトウエア | Optical information recording method |
JP2002182022A (en) | 2000-12-14 | 2002-06-26 | Canon Inc | Diffraction optical element, method for manufacturing the same, optical system having the diffraction optical element, observation device, photographing element and photographing device |
GB2372100B (en) | 2001-02-13 | 2003-04-16 | Marconi Caswell Ltd | Optical Waveguide Bragg Grating System |
US7572642B2 (en) | 2001-04-18 | 2009-08-11 | Ambrigen, Llc | Assay based on particles, which specifically bind with targets in spatially distributed characteristic patterns |
WO2002099397A2 (en) | 2001-06-06 | 2002-12-12 | Digital Optical Imaging Corporation | Light modulated microarray reader and methods relating thereto |
US6905885B2 (en) * | 2001-06-12 | 2005-06-14 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Portable pathogen detection system |
JP4565774B2 (en) | 2001-06-18 | 2010-10-20 | 株式会社リガク | Substance identification method and substance identification system |
US6722699B2 (en) | 2001-08-02 | 2004-04-20 | Eastman Kodak Company | Authentication using near-field optical imaging |
JP2003149612A (en) | 2001-08-27 | 2003-05-21 | Sumitomo Electric Ind Ltd | Optical component, optical encoder, optical decoder and optical communication system |
US6573523B1 (en) | 2001-12-12 | 2003-06-03 | Lsi Logic Corporation | Substrate surface scanning |
US7335153B2 (en) * | 2001-12-28 | 2008-02-26 | Bio Array Solutions Ltd. | Arrays of microparticles and methods of preparation thereof |
US7756305B2 (en) | 2002-01-23 | 2010-07-13 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Fast 3D cytometry for information in tissue engineering |
US6972883B2 (en) | 2002-02-15 | 2005-12-06 | Ricoh Company, Ltd. | Vibration mirror, optical scanning device, and image forming using the same, method for making the same, and method for scanning image |
JP2003258725A (en) * | 2002-02-26 | 2003-09-12 | Nec Corp | Optical packet header discrimination circuit, optical router using the same, and optical routing method |
GB2391230A (en) | 2002-07-26 | 2004-02-04 | Smartbead Technologies Ltd | Multiparameter assays using coded supports |
GB2391867A (en) | 2002-08-13 | 2004-02-18 | Smartbead Technologies Ltd | Analysis system using coded supports |
US7901630B2 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2011-03-08 | Illumina, Inc. | Diffraction grating-based encoded microparticle assay stick |
US7923260B2 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2011-04-12 | Illumina, Inc. | Method of reading encoded particles |
US7126755B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2006-10-24 | Moon John A | Method and apparatus for labeling using diffraction grating-based encoded optical identification elements |
US7441703B2 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2008-10-28 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical reader for diffraction grating-based encoded optical identification elements |
US7399643B2 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2008-07-15 | Cyvera Corporation | Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same |
WO2004019277A1 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2004-03-04 | Cyvera Corporation | Diffraction grating-based encoded micro-particles for multiplexed experiments |
WO2004019276A1 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2004-03-04 | Cyvera Corporation | Diffraction grating-based optical identification element |
US7900836B2 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2011-03-08 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical reader system for substrates having an optically readable code |
US20050227252A1 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2005-10-13 | Moon John A | Diffraction grating-based encoded articles for multiplexed experiments |
US7534488B2 (en) | 2003-09-10 | 2009-05-19 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Graded core/shell semiconductor nanorods and nanorod barcodes |
US20060160208A1 (en) | 2004-02-19 | 2006-07-20 | Cyvera Corporation | Multi-well plate with alignment grooves for encoded microparticles |
US20100255603A9 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2010-10-07 | Putnam Martin A | Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same |
WO2004025560A1 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2004-03-25 | Cyvera Corporation | Assay stick comprising coded microbeads |
US7092160B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2006-08-15 | Illumina, Inc. | Method of manufacturing of diffraction grating-based optical identification element |
US7122384B2 (en) * | 2002-11-06 | 2006-10-17 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Resonant light scattering microparticle methods |
GB2395594A (en) | 2002-11-21 | 2004-05-26 | Smartbead Technologies Ltd | Bioassay reading system using a computer to locate and identify microlabels by identifying spatially sequential groups or identification codes |
WO2004066210A1 (en) | 2003-01-22 | 2004-08-05 | Cyvera Corporation | Hybrid random bead/chip based microarray |
JP3706110B2 (en) | 2003-02-07 | 2005-10-12 | 株式会社リガク | X-ray analyzer and X-ray analysis method |
US20040175842A1 (en) * | 2003-03-04 | 2004-09-09 | Roitman Daniel B. | Near-field and far-field encoding of microbeads for bioassays |
DE602004031213D1 (en) * | 2003-05-13 | 2011-03-10 | Optware Corp | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR RECORDING / PLAYING OPTICAL INFORMATION |
US20050270603A1 (en) | 2004-02-19 | 2005-12-08 | Cyuera Corporation | Optical identification element using separate or partially overlapped diffraction gratings |
EP1815484A2 (en) | 2004-11-08 | 2007-08-08 | Zvi Kalman | System and method for an interleaved spiral cone shaping collimation |
WO2006055736A1 (en) | 2004-11-16 | 2006-05-26 | Illumina, Inc. | And methods and apparatus for reading coded microbeads |
WO2006055735A2 (en) | 2004-11-16 | 2006-05-26 | Illumina, Inc | Scanner having spatial light modulator |
US7604173B2 (en) | 2004-11-16 | 2009-10-20 | Illumina, Inc. | Holographically encoded elements for microarray and other tagging labeling applications, and method and apparatus for making and reading the same |
US20060134324A1 (en) | 2004-11-17 | 2006-06-22 | Illumina, Inc. | Filament with easily removed protective coating and methods for stripping the same |
US7830575B2 (en) * | 2006-04-10 | 2010-11-09 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical scanner with improved scan time |
-
2005
- 2005-09-13 US US11/226,892 patent/US20100255603A9/en not_active Abandoned
-
2009
- 2009-03-20 US US12/408,037 patent/US8470605B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
Patent Citations (98)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3074634A (en) * | 1961-04-17 | 1963-01-22 | Ibm | Pattern recognition |
US3791788A (en) * | 1970-06-30 | 1974-02-12 | Monsanto Co | Method for washing a tow |
US3858979A (en) * | 1971-09-29 | 1975-01-07 | Colorant Schmuckstein Gmbh | Method of determining the properties of a jewelery stone and apparatus for this method |
US4011435A (en) * | 1974-02-01 | 1977-03-08 | Ncr Corporation | Optical indicia marking and detection system |
US4815027A (en) * | 1984-04-13 | 1989-03-21 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Optical operation apparatus for effecting parallel signal processing by detecting light transmitted through a filter in the form of a matrix |
US4647544A (en) * | 1984-06-25 | 1987-03-03 | Nicoli David F | Immunoassay using optical interference detection |
US4725110A (en) * | 1984-08-13 | 1988-02-16 | United Technologies Corporation | Method for impressing gratings within fiber optics |
US4807950A (en) * | 1984-08-13 | 1989-02-28 | United Technologies Corporation | Method for impressing gratings within fiber optics |
US4992385A (en) * | 1986-07-24 | 1991-02-12 | Ares-Serono Research And Development Limited Partnership | Polymer-coated optical structures and methods of making and using the same |
USRE38430E1 (en) * | 1987-03-27 | 2004-02-17 | Becton, Dickinson And Company | Solid phase chromatographic immunoassay |
US5100238A (en) * | 1987-06-11 | 1992-03-31 | Orlon Corporation Limited | Cuvette and apparatus for performing biological assays |
US4816659A (en) * | 1987-10-13 | 1989-03-28 | Control Module Inc. | Bar code reader head |
US5091636A (en) * | 1988-02-23 | 1992-02-25 | Sony Corporation | Apparatus for detecting modulated informations from emitted light turned by an object |
US5081012A (en) * | 1988-03-29 | 1992-01-14 | Applied Research Systems Ars Holding N.V. | Waveguide sensor with input and reflecting gratings and its use in immunoassay |
US5002867A (en) * | 1988-04-25 | 1991-03-26 | Macevicz Stephen C | Nucleic acid sequence determination by multiple mixed oligonucleotide probes |
US5089387A (en) * | 1988-07-07 | 1992-02-18 | Adeza Biomedical Corporation | Dna probe diffraction assay and reagents |
US6355432B1 (en) * | 1989-06-07 | 2002-03-12 | Affymetrix Lnc. | Products for detecting nucleic acids |
US5003600A (en) * | 1989-08-03 | 1991-03-26 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Energy | Diffraction gratings used as identifying markers |
US5291006A (en) * | 1989-08-11 | 1994-03-01 | Nhk Spring Co., Ltd. | Authenticity identifying system for information storage cards |
US20020018430A1 (en) * | 1989-09-28 | 2002-02-14 | Gao Gesellschaft Fur Automation Und Organisation Mbh | Data carrier having an optically variable element and methods for producing it |
US5095194A (en) * | 1989-10-12 | 1992-03-10 | Joseph Barbanell | Holographic credit card with automatical authentication and verification |
US5090807A (en) * | 1990-01-10 | 1992-02-25 | Environmental Research Institute Of Michigan | Real time optical pre-detection processing of multispectral image data |
US5192980A (en) * | 1990-06-27 | 1993-03-09 | A. E. Dixon | Apparatus and method for method for spatially- and spectrally-resolved measurements |
US5283777A (en) * | 1991-04-26 | 1994-02-01 | Pioneer Electronic Corporation | Three-dimensional optical recording medium and optical information recording apparatus using the same |
US5196350A (en) * | 1991-05-29 | 1993-03-23 | Omnigene, Inc. | Ligand assay using interference modulation |
US5395558A (en) * | 1991-12-06 | 1995-03-07 | Johnson & Johnson Vision Products, Inc. | Method of making a soft ophthalmic lens |
US5394234A (en) * | 1991-12-19 | 1995-02-28 | Control Module Inc. | Method and apparatus for detecting forged diffraction gratings on identification means |
US5291027A (en) * | 1992-07-08 | 1994-03-01 | Toppan Printing Co., Ltd. | Optical identification multiple diffraction grating mark member and card using the same |
US5610287A (en) * | 1993-12-06 | 1997-03-11 | Molecular Tool, Inc. | Method for immobilizing nucleic acid molecules |
US5388173A (en) * | 1993-12-20 | 1995-02-07 | United Technologies Corporation | Method and apparatus for forming aperiodic gratings in optical fibers |
US5607188A (en) * | 1994-06-24 | 1997-03-04 | Imation Corp. | Marking of optical disc for customized identification |
US6204068B1 (en) * | 1995-03-07 | 2001-03-20 | Erkki Soini | Biospecific assay method |
US6025129A (en) * | 1995-04-25 | 2000-02-15 | Irori | Remotely programmable matrices with memories and uses thereof |
US6352854B1 (en) * | 1995-04-25 | 2002-03-05 | Discovery Partners International, Inc. | Remotely programmable matrices with memories |
US6340588B1 (en) * | 1995-04-25 | 2002-01-22 | Discovery Partners International, Inc. | Matrices with memories |
US6025283A (en) * | 1995-05-12 | 2000-02-15 | The Real Gold Card Company Limited | Charge card |
US5712912A (en) * | 1995-07-28 | 1998-01-27 | Mytec Technologies Inc. | Method and apparatus for securely handling a personal identification number or cryptographic key using biometric techniques |
US6017754A (en) * | 1995-08-24 | 2000-01-25 | Invitrogen Corporation | System for isolating and identifying eukaryotic cells transfected with genes and vectors, host cells and methods thereof |
US6524793B1 (en) * | 1995-10-11 | 2003-02-25 | Luminex Corporation | Multiplexed analysis of clinical specimens apparatus and method |
US6036807A (en) * | 1995-12-12 | 2000-03-14 | Ing Groep Nv | Method for applying a security code to an article |
US5729365A (en) * | 1996-01-11 | 1998-03-17 | Sandia Corporation | Computer generated holographic microtags |
US6355198B1 (en) * | 1996-03-15 | 2002-03-12 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Method of forming articles including waveguides via capillary micromolding and microtransfer molding |
US5721435A (en) * | 1996-04-09 | 1998-02-24 | Hewlett Packard Company | Methods and apparatus for measuring optical properties of biological and chemical substances |
US5861113A (en) * | 1996-08-01 | 1999-01-19 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of Commerce | Fabrication of embossed diffractive optics with reusable release agent |
US5874187A (en) * | 1996-08-15 | 1999-02-23 | Lucent Technologies Incorporated | Photo recording medium |
US6027694A (en) * | 1996-10-17 | 2000-02-22 | Texperts, Inc. | Spillproof microplate assembly |
US5881197A (en) * | 1997-02-14 | 1999-03-09 | University Of Southampton | Optical fibre and optical fibre device |
US6030581A (en) * | 1997-02-28 | 2000-02-29 | Burstein Laboratories | Laboratory in a disk |
US6692912B1 (en) * | 1997-03-05 | 2004-02-17 | Matrix Technologies Corporation | Nucleic acid-containing polymerizable complex |
US6359734B1 (en) * | 1997-06-06 | 2002-03-19 | Ovd Kinegram Ag | Surface pattern |
US6506342B1 (en) * | 1997-06-19 | 2003-01-14 | Robert D. Frankel | Tracking apparatus and method for use with combinatorial synthesis processes |
US6174648B1 (en) * | 1997-07-08 | 2001-01-16 | Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd. | Optical filter fabrication method using fiber holder with spiral groove and phase mask with spiral diffraction grating |
US6043880A (en) * | 1997-09-15 | 2000-03-28 | Becton Dickinson And Company | Automated optical reader for nucleic acid assays |
US20040047030A1 (en) * | 1997-10-29 | 2004-03-11 | Digital Optical Imaging Corporation | Apparatus and methods relating to spatially light modulated microscopy |
US6204969B1 (en) * | 1997-12-08 | 2001-03-20 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Amplitude mask, and apparatus and method for manufacturing long period grating filter using the same |
US6035082A (en) * | 1998-03-16 | 2000-03-07 | Luna Innovations, Inc. | Process for preparing an optical fiber sensor with enhanced sensitivity |
US6335824B1 (en) * | 1998-03-20 | 2002-01-01 | Genetic Microsystems, Inc. | Wide field of view and high speed scanning microscopy |
US6689316B1 (en) * | 1998-05-29 | 2004-02-10 | Cambridge University Technical Services, Ltd. | Holographic sensors and their production |
US6363097B1 (en) * | 1998-09-18 | 2002-03-26 | Nec Corporation | Semiconductor laser with a rewritable wavelength stabilizer |
US6692031B2 (en) * | 1998-12-31 | 2004-02-17 | Mcgrew Stephen P. | Quantum dot security device and method |
US6194563B1 (en) * | 1999-03-26 | 2001-02-27 | Vysis, Inc. | Solid phase nucleic acid labeling by transamination |
US20030008323A1 (en) * | 1999-04-15 | 2003-01-09 | Ilya Ravkin | Chemical-library composition and method |
US6356681B1 (en) * | 1999-07-09 | 2002-03-12 | Corning Incorporated | Method and apparatus for trimming the optical path length of optical fiber components |
US20020006664A1 (en) * | 1999-09-17 | 2002-01-17 | Sabatini David M. | Arrayed transfection method and uses related thereto |
US6514767B1 (en) * | 1999-10-06 | 2003-02-04 | Surromed, Inc. | Surface enhanced spectroscopy-active composite nanoparticles |
US6361958B1 (en) * | 1999-11-12 | 2002-03-26 | Motorola, Inc. | Biochannel assay for hybridization with biomaterial |
US6982996B1 (en) * | 1999-12-06 | 2006-01-03 | Weatherford/Lamb, Inc. | Large diameter optical waveguide, grating, and laser |
US6858184B2 (en) * | 2000-03-16 | 2005-02-22 | Sri International | Microlaboratory devices and methods |
US20020034747A1 (en) * | 2000-03-22 | 2002-03-21 | Bruchez Marcel P. | Methods of using semiconductor nanocrystals in bead-based nucleic acid assays |
US20020025534A1 (en) * | 2000-03-22 | 2002-02-28 | Goh M. Cynthia | Method and apparatus for assay for multiple analytes |
US20020022273A1 (en) * | 2000-04-06 | 2002-02-21 | Empedocles Stephen A. | Differentiable spectral bar code methods and systems |
US20020031783A1 (en) * | 2000-04-06 | 2002-03-14 | Empedocles Stephen A. | Two-dimensional spectral imaging system |
US6533183B2 (en) * | 2000-05-03 | 2003-03-18 | Novo Nordisk A/S | Coding of cartridges for an injection device |
US20020000471A1 (en) * | 2000-05-03 | 2002-01-03 | Soren Aasmul | Coding of cartridges for an injection device |
US6515753B2 (en) * | 2000-05-19 | 2003-02-04 | Aclara Biosciences, Inc. | Optical alignment in capillary detection using capillary wall scatter |
US20040027968A1 (en) * | 2000-10-12 | 2004-02-12 | Hideyoshi Horimai | Optical information recording apparatus and method, optical information reproducing apparatus and method, optical information recording reproducing apparatus and method and optical information recording medium |
US6708618B1 (en) * | 2000-10-23 | 2004-03-23 | Chialun Tsai | Method and apparatus of using a security feature which includes plural patterned microscopic makers for authentication and to prevent counterfeiting of objects |
US6522406B1 (en) * | 2001-04-20 | 2003-02-18 | Nanometrics Incorporated | Correcting the system polarization sensitivity of a metrology tool having a rotatable polarizer |
US20030032203A1 (en) * | 2001-07-10 | 2003-02-13 | Sabatini David M. | Small molecule microarrays |
US20030021003A1 (en) * | 2001-07-25 | 2003-01-30 | Hiroaki Ono | Beam shutter |
US6678429B2 (en) * | 2001-08-27 | 2004-01-13 | Lightsmyth Technologies, Inc. | Amplitude and phase control in distributed optical structures |
US20050042764A1 (en) * | 2002-02-07 | 2005-02-24 | Sailor Michael J | Optically encoded particles |
US20060028727A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2006-02-09 | Moon John A | Method and apparatus for drug product tracking using encoded optical identification elements |
US7190522B2 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2007-03-13 | Cyvera Corporation | Chemical synthesis using diffraction grating-based encoded optical elements |
US7349158B2 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2008-03-25 | Cyvera Corporation | Diffraction grating-based encoded micro-particles for multiplexed experiments |
US20060050544A1 (en) * | 2002-10-09 | 2006-03-09 | Optware Corporation | Information recording method, reproducing method, and recording reproducing method utilizing holography |
US7321541B2 (en) * | 2002-10-09 | 2008-01-22 | Optware Corporation | Information recording method, reproducing method, and recording/reproducing method utilizing holography |
US7339148B2 (en) * | 2002-12-16 | 2008-03-04 | Olympus America Inc. | Confocal microscope |
US7164533B2 (en) * | 2003-01-22 | 2007-01-16 | Cyvera Corporation | Hybrid random bead/chip based microarray |
US20060057729A1 (en) * | 2003-09-12 | 2006-03-16 | Illumina, Inc. | Diffraction grating-based encoded element having a substance disposed thereon |
US20050056587A1 (en) * | 2003-09-17 | 2005-03-17 | Vortechnics, Inc. | Apparatus for separating floating and non-floating particulate from a fluid stream |
US20060023310A1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2006-02-02 | Putnam Martin A | Optical identification element using separate or partially overlapped diffraction gratings |
US20090034078A1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2009-02-05 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical identification element having a non-waveguide substrate |
US20060067179A1 (en) * | 2004-09-16 | 2006-03-30 | Optware Corporation | Optical information recording device and optical information reproduction device |
US20090073520A1 (en) * | 2004-11-17 | 2009-03-19 | Illumina, Inc. | Encoded microparticles and a method for fabricating |
US7508608B2 (en) * | 2004-11-17 | 2009-03-24 | Illumina, Inc. | Lithographically fabricated holographic optical identification element |
US20090040885A1 (en) * | 2005-09-09 | 2009-02-12 | Optware Corporation | Search Method |
US20100025482A1 (en) * | 2005-11-22 | 2010-02-04 | Illumina Corporation | Composition including an item and an encoded optical identification element that is physically associated with the item |
Cited By (88)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7901630B2 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2011-03-08 | Illumina, Inc. | Diffraction grating-based encoded microparticle assay stick |
US7923260B2 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2011-04-12 | Illumina, Inc. | Method of reading encoded particles |
US8333325B2 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2012-12-18 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical reader system for substrates having an optically readable code |
US20060071075A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2006-04-06 | Moon John A | Optical reader for diffraction grating-based encoded optical identification elements |
US20060072177A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2006-04-06 | Putnam Martin A | Diffraction grating-based encoded microparticle assay stick |
US20050227252A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2005-10-13 | Moon John A | Diffraction grating-based encoded articles for multiplexed experiments |
US7872804B2 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2011-01-18 | Illumina, Inc. | Encoded particle having a grating with variations in the refractive index |
US20090194589A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2009-08-06 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical reader system for substrates having an optically readable code |
US7900836B2 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2011-03-08 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical reader system for substrates having an optically readable code |
US20100246005A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2010-09-30 | Cyvera Corporation | Encoded particle having a grating with variations in the refractive index |
US20110114729A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2011-05-19 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical reader system for substrates having an optically readable code |
US8614852B2 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2013-12-24 | Illumina, Inc. | Elongated microparticles having an optically detectable code configured to at least one of reflect or filter light |
US8498052B2 (en) | 2002-08-20 | 2013-07-30 | Illumina, Inc. | Composition including an item and an encoded optical substrate and a method for identifying an item |
US20100246007A1 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2010-09-30 | Illumina Corporation | composition including an item and an encoded optical substrate and a method for identifying an item |
US7898735B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2011-03-01 | Illumina, Inc. | Methods and systems for writing an optical code within or on a fiber substrate |
US8470605B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2013-06-25 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical reader for reading encoded microparticles |
US20100255603A9 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2010-10-07 | Putnam Martin A | Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same |
US20080165656A1 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2008-07-10 | Moon John A | Method of Manufacturing of a Diffraction Grating-Based Optical Identification Element |
US20070236796A1 (en) * | 2002-09-12 | 2007-10-11 | Illumina, Inc. | Method of manufacturing of a diffraction grating-based optical identification element |
US9268983B2 (en) | 2003-01-22 | 2016-02-23 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical system and method for reading encoded microbeads |
US7659983B2 (en) | 2003-01-22 | 2010-02-09 | Electronics And Telecommunications Resarch Institute | Hybrid random bead/chip based microarray |
US7843567B2 (en) | 2003-01-22 | 2010-11-30 | Illumina, Inc. | Methods of identifying an analyte and nucleic acid analysis |
US20110058172A1 (en) * | 2003-01-22 | 2011-03-10 | Illumina, Inc. | Methods of identifying analytes and using encoded particles |
US8049893B2 (en) | 2003-01-22 | 2011-11-01 | Illumina, Inc. | Methods of identifying analytes and using encoded particles |
US20100099574A1 (en) * | 2003-01-22 | 2010-04-22 | Cyvera Corporation | Methods of identifying an analyte and nucleic acid analysis |
US8565475B2 (en) | 2003-08-20 | 2013-10-22 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical system and method for reading encoded microbeads |
US8081792B2 (en) | 2003-08-20 | 2011-12-20 | Illumina, Inc. | Fourier scattering methods for encoding microbeads and methods and apparatus for reading the same |
US20060119913A1 (en) * | 2003-08-20 | 2006-06-08 | Illumina, Inc. | Fourier scattering methods for encoding microbeads and methods and apparatus for reading the same |
US20060057729A1 (en) * | 2003-09-12 | 2006-03-16 | Illumina, Inc. | Diffraction grating-based encoded element having a substance disposed thereon |
US20050220408A1 (en) * | 2004-02-19 | 2005-10-06 | Cyvera Corporation | Optical identification element having non-waveguide photosensitive substrate with diffraction grating therein |
US7791802B2 (en) | 2004-02-19 | 2010-09-07 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical identification element having a non-waveguide substrate |
US20060118630A1 (en) * | 2004-11-16 | 2006-06-08 | Illumina, Inc. | Holographically encoded elements for microarray and other tagging labeling applications, and method and apparatus for making and reading the same |
US7796333B2 (en) | 2004-11-17 | 2010-09-14 | Illumina, Inc. | Encoded microparticles and a method for fabricating |
US20090073520A1 (en) * | 2004-11-17 | 2009-03-19 | Illumina, Inc. | Encoded microparticles and a method for fabricating |
US20060132877A1 (en) * | 2004-11-17 | 2006-06-22 | Illumina, Inc. | Lithographically fabricated holographic optical identification element |
US8088555B2 (en) | 2005-09-13 | 2012-01-03 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Multiple step printing methods for microbarcodes |
US20100227279A1 (en) * | 2005-09-13 | 2010-09-09 | True Randall J | Methods for producing codes for microparticles |
US20100297448A1 (en) * | 2005-09-13 | 2010-11-25 | True Randall J | Miniaturized microparticles |
US20100297336A1 (en) * | 2005-09-13 | 2010-11-25 | Randall True | Multiple Step Printing Methods for Microbarcodes |
US8748079B2 (en) | 2005-09-13 | 2014-06-10 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Multiple step printing methods for microbarcodes |
US20070148599A1 (en) * | 2005-09-13 | 2007-06-28 | Randall True | Multiple step printing methods for microbarcodes |
US8945811B2 (en) | 2005-09-13 | 2015-02-03 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Miniaturized microparticles |
US20080038559A1 (en) * | 2005-09-13 | 2008-02-14 | Randall True | Miniaturized microparticles |
US20100227770A1 (en) * | 2005-09-13 | 2010-09-09 | Randall True | Brownian microbarcodes for bioassays |
US7745092B2 (en) | 2005-09-13 | 2010-06-29 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Multiple step printing methods for microbarcodes |
US8168368B2 (en) | 2005-09-13 | 2012-05-01 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Miniaturized microparticles |
US8178278B2 (en) | 2005-09-13 | 2012-05-15 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Miniaturized microparticles |
US7745091B2 (en) | 2005-09-13 | 2010-06-29 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Miniaturized microparticles |
US8592136B2 (en) | 2005-09-13 | 2013-11-26 | Affymetrix, Inc. | Methods for producing codes for microparticles |
US20070121181A1 (en) * | 2005-11-22 | 2007-05-31 | Cyvera Corporation | Method and apparatus for labeling using optical identification elements characterized by X-ray diffraction |
US7830575B2 (en) | 2006-04-10 | 2010-11-09 | Illumina, Inc. | Optical scanner with improved scan time |
US20070236789A1 (en) * | 2006-04-10 | 2007-10-11 | Moon John A | Optical scanner with improved scan time |
US20090137053A1 (en) * | 2007-05-10 | 2009-05-28 | Sony Corporation | Bead set, production process of the bead set, and method of using the bead set |
US20110057797A1 (en) * | 2009-09-09 | 2011-03-10 | Absolute Software Corporation | Alert for real-time risk of theft or loss |
US8524450B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2013-09-03 | Illumina, Inc. | Microvessels, microparticles, and methods of manufacturing and using the same |
US20110105361A1 (en) * | 2009-10-30 | 2011-05-05 | Illumina, Inc. | Microvessels, microparticles, and methods of manufacturing and using the same |
US9023638B2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2015-05-05 | Illumina, Inc. | Microvessels, microparticles, and methods of manufacturing and using the same |
WO2011053845A2 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2011-05-05 | Illumina, Inc. | Microvessels, microparticles, and methods of manufacturing and using the same |
US9216412B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2015-12-22 | Cyvek, Inc. | Microfluidic devices and methods of manufacture and use |
US9759718B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2017-09-12 | Cyvek, Inc. | PDMS membrane-confined nucleic acid and antibody/antigen-functionalized microlength tube capture elements, and systems employing them, and methods of their use |
US10252263B2 (en) * | 2009-11-23 | 2019-04-09 | Cyvek, Inc. | Microfluidic devices and methods of manufacture and use |
US10065403B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2018-09-04 | Cyvek, Inc. | Microfluidic assay assemblies and methods of manufacture |
US9229001B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2016-01-05 | Cyvek, Inc. | Method and apparatus for performing assays |
US10022696B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2018-07-17 | Cyvek, Inc. | Microfluidic assay systems employing micro-particles and methods of manufacture |
US9500645B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2016-11-22 | Cyvek, Inc. | Micro-tube particles for microfluidic assays and methods of manufacture |
US9546932B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2017-01-17 | Cyvek, Inc. | Microfluidic assay operating system and methods of use |
US9855735B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2018-01-02 | Cyvek, Inc. | Portable microfluidic assay devices and methods of manufacture and use |
US9651568B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2017-05-16 | Cyvek, Inc. | Methods and systems for epi-fluorescent monitoring and scanning for microfluidic assays |
US9700889B2 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2017-07-11 | Cyvek, Inc. | Methods and systems for manufacture of microarray assay systems, conducting microfluidic assays, and monitoring and scanning to obtain microfluidic assay results |
US10698107B2 (en) | 2010-11-01 | 2020-06-30 | Rowe Technologies, Inc. | Multi frequency 2D phased array transducer |
EP2689253A2 (en) * | 2011-03-22 | 2014-01-29 | Cyvek, Inc. | Microfluidic devices and methods of manufacture and use |
EP2689253A4 (en) * | 2011-03-22 | 2014-12-10 | Cyvek Inc | Microfluidic devices and methods of manufacture and use |
CN103649759A (en) * | 2011-03-22 | 2014-03-19 | 西维克公司 | Microfluidic devices and methods of manufacture and use |
JP2013064722A (en) * | 2011-05-13 | 2013-04-11 | Jvc Kenwood Corp | Disk for sample analysis |
US9610597B1 (en) | 2011-10-27 | 2017-04-04 | Copilot Ventures Fund Iii Llc | Methods of delivery of encapsulated perfluorocarbon taggants |
US10543503B1 (en) | 2011-10-27 | 2020-01-28 | Copilot Ventures Fund Iii Llc | Methods of delivery of encapsulated perfluorocarbon taggants |
US11060135B2 (en) | 2011-10-28 | 2021-07-13 | Illumina, Inc. | Microarray fabrication system and method |
US10280454B2 (en) | 2011-10-28 | 2019-05-07 | Illumina, Inc. | Microarray fabrication system and method |
US11834704B2 (en) | 2011-10-28 | 2023-12-05 | Illumina, Inc. | Microarray fabrication system and method |
US20190310117A1 (en) * | 2013-02-21 | 2019-10-10 | Rowe Technologies, Inc. | Acquatic velocity scanning apparatus and methods |
US10228367B2 (en) | 2015-12-01 | 2019-03-12 | ProteinSimple | Segmented multi-use automated assay cartridge |
US11219897B2 (en) * | 2015-12-31 | 2022-01-11 | Curiosis Co., Ltd. | Device for separating or aligning fine particles, and method for separating or aligning fine particles using same |
US11143758B2 (en) * | 2017-10-13 | 2021-10-12 | Navico Holding As | Sonar transducer performance optimization |
US11047964B2 (en) * | 2018-02-28 | 2021-06-29 | Navico Holding As | Sonar transducer having geometric elements |
US11105922B2 (en) | 2018-02-28 | 2021-08-31 | Navico Holding As | Sonar transducer having geometric elements |
US11668823B2 (en) | 2018-02-28 | 2023-06-06 | Navico, Inc. | Sonar transducer having geometric elements |
US20190265340A1 (en) * | 2018-02-28 | 2019-08-29 | Navico Holding As | Sonar transducer having geometric elements |
EP4212881A1 (en) * | 2021-12-28 | 2023-07-19 | Sysmex Corporation | Sample measuring method, cartridge, and sample measuring device |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US8470605B2 (en) | 2013-06-25 |
US20100072278A1 (en) | 2010-03-25 |
US20100255603A9 (en) | 2010-10-07 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US8470605B2 (en) | Optical reader for reading encoded microparticles | |
US7399643B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same | |
CA2538801A1 (en) | Improved method and apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same | |
US7901630B2 (en) | Diffraction grating-based encoded microparticle assay stick | |
US20060160208A1 (en) | Multi-well plate with alignment grooves for encoded microparticles | |
KR101736525B1 (en) | Sample processing cartridge and method of processing and/or analysing a sample under centrifugal force | |
WO2006076053A1 (en) | Method an apparatus for aligning microbeads in order to interrogate the same | |
RU2527686C2 (en) | Analysis device and method for performing biological analyses | |
EP0890094B1 (en) | Microfabricated diffusion-based chemical sensor | |
US20040126875A1 (en) | Assay stick | |
WO2005079544A9 (en) | Multi-well plate with alignment grooves for encoded microparticles | |
US6643010B2 (en) | Multiple microchannels chip for biomolecule imaging | |
WO2004066210A1 (en) | Hybrid random bead/chip based microarray | |
WO2005029047A2 (en) | Diffraction grating-based encoded microparticle assay stick | |
CN112805092A (en) | Device with optically readable liquid reservoir |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: ILLUMINA, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:CYVERA CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:017166/0311 Effective date: 20060214 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: ILLUMINA, INC, CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:PUTNAM, MARTIN A.;LEMOINE, RICHARD L.;SIGNING DATES FROM 20081001 TO 20081009;REEL/FRAME:021664/0882 Owner name: ILLUMINA, INC, CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:PUTNAM, MARTIN A.;LEMOINE, RICHARD L.;REEL/FRAME:021664/0882;SIGNING DATES FROM 20081001 TO 20081009 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |